Panasonic DMR ES45V User Manual To The Ba178e5b 039a 4fed 810d 03e57e59bb7f
User Manual: Panasonic DMR-ES45V to the manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 1
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Español
Reference
Convenient
functions
Transferring
(Copying)
Editing
Playing back
Recording
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-ES45V
DMR-ES46V
P
RQTV0141
Getting started
Operating Instructions
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN
MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC
SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN,
MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND
THAT NO OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS,
SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON THE
APPARATUS.
CAUTION!
DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER
MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION VENTS.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE SCREWS.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the
user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
-If you see this symbolInformation on Disposal in other Countries outside the
European Union
ior orectT/F30O
(Inside of product)
2
RQTV0141
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit. Follow the safety instructions on the unit and the applicable safety instructions
listed below. Keep these operating instructions handy for future reference.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
(8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
(9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or groundingtype plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than
the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided
for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,
consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
(10)Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
(11)Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
(12)Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with
the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
(13)Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
(14)Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is
required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
Unit care
The precision parts in the unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean the unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, thinner or benzine to clean the unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, possibly
making it impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner about once every year, depending on
frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720PP
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
∫ Cautions as to condensation
Condensation can cause unreliable playback of VHS recordings.
Condensation may form in the following cases,
≥The unit is brought from cold surroundings into a well-heated room.
≥The unit is suddenly brought from cool surroundings, such as an
air-conditioned room or car, to a place which is hot and humid.
≥During the rainy season.
In any of the above-mentioned conditions, do not operate the unit for
at least 2 hours. The unit is not equipped with a dew sensor.
∫ Other precautions for installation
≥The unit should not be installed or operated near large magnets or
electromagnetic devices. Such devices can damage pre-recorded
VHS recordings.
≥Do not place any heavy objects atop the unit, and do not install it in
a confined space. Please allow for adequate air circulation.
≥The unit should not be mounted in a vertical position. It’s designed
to operate in the horizontal position.
∫ When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household AC outlet. The unit consumes a small amount of power even when it is turned off.
Standby power consumption
∫ Quick Start (l 63)
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM°
° From the power off state, recording on DVD-RAM starts about 1 second after first pressing the [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] and then sequentially
pressing the [¥, REC] (Quick Start Mode).
3
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 4 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Table of contents
Getting started
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Disc and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Discs that cannot be played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Concerning logo marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Cards usable on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
≥Suitable SD Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Using DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL and
+RW on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Disc and card handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Video cassette information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Inserting/Removing the SD card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connection with a television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connection with a television and
cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
If the antenna connector doesn’t match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
DVD output and DVD/VHS output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
To enjoy higher picture quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
≥Connecting to the TV S VIDEO IN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
≥Connecting to the TV COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals. . . 16
Connecting an amplifier or system component . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting with an HDMI
(High Definition Multimedia Interface) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . 17
≥Connecting to a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
≥Connecting to an amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Control with HDMI (HDAVI Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
STEP 2 Plug-in Auto Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
≥Restart Plug-in Auto Tuning
(after relocation, for example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
≥Restart Set Channels Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
≥Adding and deleting channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
≥Set Clock Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Other settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Channel captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
≥Preset Channel Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
≥Manual Channel Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Selecting television type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
When other Panasonic products respond to
this remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
≥Set Clock Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
≥Adjust Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Removing Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Recording
Recording television programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4
RQTV0141
Inserting discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Inserting a video cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Recording procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
≥Recording modes and
approximate recording times (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
≥Recording modes (VHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
≥Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
≥When the format confirmation screen is displayed . . . . . . . . 27
≥When remove a recorded disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
To specify a time to stop recording
– One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Selecting audio to record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Auto Bilingual Choice Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Playing DVD while recording VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playing VHS while recording DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Watching the TV while recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
≥Playing from the beginning of the title you are recording
– Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
≥Playing a title previously recorded while recording
– Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space) . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Scheduled Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Cautions for using scheduled recording on
DVD and VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Programming scheduled recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
≥Cancel scheduled recording that has already begun . . . . . . .31
≥Release program from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
≥Auto SP/EP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
≥Check, change or delete programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Playing back
Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
≥When a menu screen appears on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Selecting recorded titles to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Quick View (Play t1.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Fast forward and rewind– SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Skipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Slow-motion play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Frame-by-frame viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Direct play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
CM Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Create chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Skipping the specified time — Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Using menus to play MP3 and
still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Playing discs which contain both MP3 and
still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Playing MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
≥Using the tree screen to find a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
To show Pictures Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Playing still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
≥To select the still pictures in another folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
≥Start Slideshow/Slideshow settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
≥To rotate a still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
≥To zoom in/out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
≥To delete a still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
≥To show the picture properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Playing a video cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fast-forward/Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Cue/Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Jet Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Jet Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Repeat Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Adjusting the playback picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
≥Manual tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
≥Vertical locking adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
VHS Index Search System (VISS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Various on-screen display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
≥Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
- Disc menu – Setting disc content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
- Play menu – Change play sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
- Video menu – Change picture quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
- Audio menu – Change sound effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
- Other menu – Change the display position . . . . . . . . . . . .40
FUNCTIONS window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Editing
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Editing titles/Chapters and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Delete Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Album View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Edit Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Title Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Set Protection/Cancel Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Shorten Title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Change Thumbnail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥View Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Delete Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Create Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Combine Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- View Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
41
41
41
42
42
42
42
42
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
Creating, editing and playing playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Creating playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playlist operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Delete Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Playlist Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Change Thumbnail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥View Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Add Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Move Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Create Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Combine Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Delete Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- View Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Album and picture operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Add Picture/Create Album. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Delete Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Set Protection/Cancel Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Print Order (DPOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Album View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Edit Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Album Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Delete Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Protection Setup/Cancel Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
47
47
47
47
48
48
48
48
48
48
Transferring (Copying)
Transferring (Copying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Before transferring (copying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Transfer (Copying) from VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
≥One Touch Transfer (Copying) (VHS l DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer (Copying) . . . . . . . .
Transfer (Copying) from DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥One Touch Transfer (Copying) (DVD l VHS) . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer (Copying) . . . . . . . .
≥Transfer (Copying) a DVD-Video, finalized DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, or +R DL . . .
Transfer (Copying) still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥Copying all the still pictures on a card
– Copy All Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer (Copying) . . . . . . . .
Recording from an external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DV camcorder recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
51
52
52
53
54
55
55
55
57
57
Convenient functions
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Deleting title or pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Selecting recorded titles or pictures to delete
– Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Deleting title or picture during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DVD and card Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Providing a disc with a name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all titles and playlists–Delete All Titles . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all contents of a disc or card – Format . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
–Playback will start with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment – Finalize . . .
Enabling the second layer on DL (dual-or double-layer
on single side) discs to be recordable–Close First Layer . . .
Creating Top Menu–Create DVD Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
60
60
61
61
61
62
62
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a password (Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the speaker setting to suit your speakers . . . . . . . . .
63
63
63
66
Reference
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limited Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
68
69
74
75
76
77
Referencia rápida en español. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
(Spanish Quick Reference)
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
∫ About descriptions in these operating
instructions
≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as (l ±±).
Accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories. Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement parts.
(Product numbers correct as of January 2006. These may be subject to change.)
To order accessories, refer to “Accessory Purchases” on page 77.
∏ 1 AC power supply cord ≥For use with the unit only. ∏ 1 75 ≠ coaxial cable
(VFA0461)
Do not use it with other
(K2KZ2BA00001)
equipment. Also, do not
use cords belonging to
other equipment with the
unit.
∏ 1 Remote control
(EUR7659Y70)
∏ 1 Audio/Video cable
(K2KA6BA00003)
Product Registration Card
Please complete and return the included product
registration card, or register via the Internet at:
http://www.prodreg.com/panasonic/
∏ 1 DVD-RAM
∏ 1 HDMI cable
(DMR-ES46V only)
(K1HA19DA0002)
∏ 2 Batteries for the
remote control
R6 size
5
RQTV0141
Disc and card information
°1
You can record onto the second layer of dual- or double-layer discs after closing the first layer (l 62). You will no longer be able to record to
the first layer after you do this (l 9).
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
°2 You may not be able to use +R recorded on this unit in another Panasonic DVD recorder and vice versa. Once the disc is finalized, however,
it can be played in the other unit.
°3 The amount of the recordable disc space doesn’t increase even if the program is deleted when you use a one time recording disc.
°4 This unit can use the high-speed recording discs shown in the chart, but using them will not shorten the recording time.
°5 You can play 8x recording speed discs recorded on another equipment.
°6 Play on DVD-R DL compatible equipment.
°7 CPRM (l 76) compatible discs only
°8 The recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.
≥The explanations concerning discs are indicated by [DVD], and those concerning video are indicated by [VHS].
≥We recommend using Panasonic discs. We recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches and dirt.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
≥You cannot record programs that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL and DVD-RW on this unit. You can
record other programs as DVD-Video format.
≥For the recording time, refer to “Recording modes and approximate recording times (DVD)” on page 26.
6
RQTV0141
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Play-only discs
Disc type
DVD-Video
DVD-Audio
DVD-RW
(DVD Video Recording format)
Audio CD
Video CD
Logo
–
Indicated in these
instructions with
Instructions
[DVD-V]
High quality
movie and
music discs
[DVD-A]
High fidelity
music discs
≥Played on
this unit in 2
channels
[-RW‹VR›]
[CD]
DVD-RW° recorded on another DVD
recorder
≥You can play programs that allow “One
time only recording” if they have been
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (l 61) the disc, you can
record to it in DVD-Video format.
≥It may be necessary to finalize the disc
on the equipment used for recording.
Recorded
audio and
music
(including CDR/RW°)
CD-R° and
CD-RW° with
music
recorded in
MP3 (l 34)
Still pictures
(JPEG and
TIFF)
recorded on
CD-R/RW°
Disc and card information
M6VP&PC.book 7 ページ
[VCD]
Recorded
music and
video
(including CDR/RW°)
° Play may be impossible on some DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format), CD-R or CD-RW discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥You can play still pictures (JPEG/TIFF), CD-DA, Video CD and MP3 format data recorded on CD-R/RW. Close the session or finalize the disc
after recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
Note about using a DualDisc
The digital audio content side of a DualDisc does not meet the technical specifications of the Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) format so play
may not be possible.
Regarding DVD-Audio
Some multi-channel DVD-Audio will prevent down-mixing (l 76) of all or part of their contents if this is the manufacturer’s intention. Tracks
that are prevented from being down-mixed will not play properly on this unit (e.g. audio is played from the front two channels only). Refer to the
disc’s jacket for more information.
Discs that cannot be played
≥2.6/5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm (5z)
≥3.95/4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R recorded in DVD Video Recording format
≥DVD-R (DVD-Video format), DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalized
(l 61, “Enabling discs to be played on other equipment –Finalize”)
≥PAL discs (you can still play the audio on DVD-Audio)
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “1” or “ALL”
≥Blu-ray
≥DVD-ROM, +R 8cm (3z), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, DivX Video Disc, etc.
Concerning logo marks
Dolby Digital (l 64)
This is a method of coding digital signals
developed by Dolby Laboratories. Not only stereo
(2 channel) audio, these signals can also be multichannel audio. A large amount of audio information
can be recorded on one disc by this method.
DTS Digital Surround (l 64)
This surround system is used in many movie
theaters around the world. The separation
between channels is good and the compression
ratio is low, so realistic sound effects are possible.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem with the
unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.
7
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 8 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Disc and card information
Cards usable on this unit
SD Memory Card, miniSDTM Card§, MultiMediaCard
Type
Indicated in these
instructions by
[SD]
Data that can be
recorded and played
Instructions
Still pictures
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
§
A miniSDTM card adaptor included with the miniSDTM card is necessary.
≥You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera, etc. (l 35, 55)
≥You can set the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) for automatic printing on your home printer or at a photo
developing store. (l 48, 76)
Structure of folders displayed by this unit
The following
can be displayed on this unit.
DVD-RAM
Card
*
*
.JPG
XXXX
.JPG
.TIF
XXXX
.TIF
DCIM
XXXX
∫ Suitable SD Memory Cards
*
*
XXXX
XXXX
JPEG
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with the following capacities (from
8 MB to 2 GB).
(Higher folder)
.JPG
(Higher folder)
DCIM
XXXXX
XXXXX
(Picture folder)
XXXX
.JPG
XXXX
.TIF
DCIM
**
IM
(Picture folder)
XXXX
.JPG
XXXX
.TIF
CDPF or IMEXPORT
XXXX
.JPG
XXXX
.TIF
**
XXXXX
XXXX
.JPG
XXXX
.TIF
: Numbers
XXX: Letters
* This can be also displayed
** Folders can be created on other equipment. However, these
folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.
≥The folder cannot be displayed if the numbers are all “0” (e.g.,
DCIM000, etc.).
8
RQTV0141
≥If a folder name or file name has been input using other equipment,
the name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to
play or edit the data.
8 MB,
256 MB,
16 MB,
512 MB,
32 MB,
1 GB,
64 MB,
128 MB,
2 GB (Maximum)
≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs (This site is in English
only.)
≥If the SD Memory Card is formatted on other equipment, the time
spent for recording may become longer. Also if the SD Memory
Card is formatted on a PC, you may not be able to use it on this
unit.
In these cases, format the card on this unit. (l 61, 76)
≥This unit supports SD Memory Cards formatted in FAT 12 system
and FAT 16 system based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
Using DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL and +RW on this unit
Restrictions with DVD-R, etc.°
≥16:9 aspect programs are recorded in 4:3 aspect.
≥Either Main or SAP can be recorded for MTS broadcasts.
≥Playing the disc on other DVD players is not possible before finalizing.
° DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL and +RW are collectively referred to as “DVD-R, etc.” on this page.
Therefore, follow the steps below when you use DVD-R, etc.
∫ When recording an SAP program to DVD-R, etc.
Select the audio to record before recording or transferring (copying).
Some television programs are broadcast in SAP (Secondary Audio Program). You have to select the audio recording type before recording or
transferring (copying) them to DVD-R, etc.
∫ Playing the disc on other DVD players
The disc must be finalized after recording or transferring (Copying) (l 61).
It is necessary to finalize DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or transferring (copying) titles to them. You can then play them as a
commercially sold DVD-Video. However the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or transfer (copy).°
° You can record and transfer (copy) again if you format DVD-RW.
∫ Recording to a DVD-R DL and +R DL
DVD-R DL and +R DL discs have two layers of recording surface on one side.
It is not possible to record continuously from the first layer to the second layer. Recording stops when space on the first layer becomes full.
You must close the first layer to start recording on the second layer. Closing makes the first layer unavailable for recording (editing is still
available). You cannot cancel closing. Make certain before proceeding.
9
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 10 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
The remote control
∫ About batteries
≥Insert so the poles
(i and j) match
those in the remote
control.
≥Do not use
rechargeable type
batteries.
∫ How to use the remote control
Aim at the sensor, avoiding obstacles, at a maximum range of 7 m
(23 feet) directly in front of the unit.
Remote control signal sensor
R6/LR6, AA
Do not:
≥mix old and new batteries.
≥use different types at the same time.
≥heat or expose to flame.
≥take apart or short circuit.
≥attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
20
20
30
30
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Note
≥If you cannot operate the unit or TV using the remote control after
changing the batteries, please re-enter the codes (l 21).
7 m (23 feet) directly
in front of the unit
Notes
≥Keep the transmission window and the unit’s sensor free from
dust.
≥Operation can be affected by strong light sources, such as direct
sunlight, inverter fluorescent lamps, and the glass doors on
cabinets.
Disc and card handling
∫ How to hold a disc or card
∫ Handling precautions
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and unbalanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
≥Do not drop, stack, or cause impact to discs. Do not place objects
on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
- Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs etc.).
- Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
- Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart shapes.
∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs
Be careful about scratches and dirt.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
- In direct sunlight.
- In very dusty or humid areas.
- Near a heater.
- Locations susceptible to significant differences in temperature
changes (condensation can occur).
- Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
or cartridges when you are not using them.
10
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 11 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
∫ Video cassettes
≥Break off the video cassette’s tab to prevent accidental erasure. Cover the hole with a double layer of
adhesive tape when you want to use the video cassette for recording again.
≥You can use video cassettes with the VHS and S-VHS marks, but the unit is unable to make full use of the
characteristics of S-VHS video cassettes.
Tab
∫ Video cassette care
≥Poor quality or damaged video cassettes can cause the heads to become dirty and malfunction. Store your video cassettes carefully and
discard them when they become dirty or damaged.
≥Never use video cassettes on which juice has been spilled or those that are extremely damaged since this will not only cause the heads to
become dirty, but will also make the unit malfunction.
∫ Maintenance
Cleaning the video heads
Dirt on the video heads can cause poor recording and play.
If the picture does not improve, use an optional head-cleaning cassette (part number
NV-TCL30PT). If the problem persists, seek advice from a qualified service person.
Inserting/Removing the SD card
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or remove the
card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s contents.
Opening the cover
Press down.
Inserting the card
Removing the card
Press on the center of
the card until it clicks into
place.
miniSDTM card, insert it
REC
REC
1 Press on the center
of the card.
2 Pull it straight out.
If you are using a
COPYI
NG
into the miniSDTM card
adaptor that comes
with the card.
Insert and remove this
adaptor from the unit.
Closing the cover
Push up.
ADAPTER
REC
REC
Insert the card label up with the cut-off corner on the right.
(Do not forget to close the cover. l right)
Automatic drive select function
If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card Operations” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [ENTER] to switch to
the SD drive (l 35, 55). If you remove an SD card, the DVD drive is automatically selected.
Keep the small memory cards such as the SD Memory Card out of reach of children. If swallowed, seek
medical advice immediately.
Useful features
You can enjoy both DVD, VHS and SD with the unit.
This DVD Recorder can record images and sounds in high quality to rapid random access capable DVD media. This has resulted in many new
features that outperform older tape formats. The following information summarizes a few of these features.
∫ DVD
Progressive output (l 16, 20)
If you connect the unit with a progressive output-compatible TV, you
can enjoy higher-quality and less-flicker images than conventional
TVs (of the interlace output type) can present.
Finalize (l 61)
Simultaneous recording and play (l 28)
With this function, you can play a previously recorded video program
while recording another program.
Time Slip (l 33)
This function enables you to jump to the scene you specify during
play.
This function enables you to play recorded DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) +R and +R DL on other players.
One touch transfer (copy) (l 50, 52)
Instant play (l 32)
DV input terminal (l 57)
This function can quickly find and play a video program you wish to
watch. Direct Navigator guides you to the beginning of a previously
recorded video immediately.
The DV camcorder recording function of this unit lets you easily copy
a video to the DVD by connecting only a single DV cable.
Quick view (l 32)
∫ VHS
Long recording (l 26)
This function allows you to watch news, information and other
programs in a short time.
This function can copy video from VHS to DVD and vice versa.
Chasing play (l 28)
With this function, you can record approx. 10 hours of video onto a
T-120 cassette, for example.
There is no need to wait until recording is complete. Without
stopping recording, you can play the video currently being recorded
from its beginning.
∫ SD card
SD card slot (l above)
Instant recording (l 25)
You no longer need to search for empty disc space. By pressing the
recording button, the unit finds available recording space and begins
recording right away.
The remote control/Disc and card handling/Video cassette information/Inserting/Removing the SD card/Useful features
Video cassette information
The SD card slot of this unit lets you play digital camera photographs
and copy them from a card to DVD-RAM for easy storage without
using a computer.
11
RQTV0141
Control reference guide
Remote control
(14)
∫ [DRIVE SELECT] button
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
(1)
(2)
(15)
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
(3)
(4)
(5)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
DELETE
SKIP/INDEX
REW
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
FF
PLAY
CM SKIP
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
(20)
(21)
(22)
RETURN
(23)
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
(17)
(18)
(19)
TIONS
FUNC
(7)
ADD/DLT
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
(6)
CH
RESET
STOP
(16)
F Rec
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
Turn the unit on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 18
Select drive (DVD, VHS or SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l above
Select channels and title numbers etc./Enter numbers
Cancel/Reset the tape counter
Basic operations for recording and play
Skip the specified time/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 33
Jet rewind button (JET REW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 37
(7) Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 32, 34
(8) Selection/Enter, Frame-by-frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 18, 33
(9) Show sub menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 36, 41, 45
(10) Select audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 27, 33
View select (A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 53
(11) Show on-screen menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 39
View select (B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 53
(12) Start recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 25
(13) Change recording mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 25, 30
(14) Transmission window
(15) TV operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 21, 28
(16) Channel select/
TRACKING/V-LOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 38
(17) Add/delete channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 19
(18) Input select (IN1, IN2, DV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 57
(19) Delete items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 59
(20) Skip a minute forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 33
(21) Show scheduled recording list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 30
(22) Show FUNCTIONS window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 40
(23) Return to previous screen
(24) Select VCR/TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 23
(25) Create chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 33
(26) Start Flexible Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 29
(27) Show status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 38, 40
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Notes
≥Buttons such as the [¥, REC] button do not protrude as much as
other buttons to stop them from being pressed accidentally.
≥The word “button” is not used in these operating instructions so
“Press the [ENTER] button.” is shown as “Press [ENTER].”
≥You can use this remote control to operate your TV if you set the
TV manufacturer code (l 21).
12
RQTV0141
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Control reference guide
M6VP&PC.book 13 ページ
Main unit
(1)
(3) (4) (5)
(2)
EJECT
OPEN /CLOSE
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
CH
REC
COPYING
IN 2
(6)
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L /MONO AUDIO R
(7)
(10) (11) (12) (13)
(8) (9)
Cassette eject button (<, EJECT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 24
Disc tray open/close button (<, OPEN/CLOSE). . . . . . l 24
Stop button (∫) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 32, 37
Play/t1.3 button (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 32, 37
Recording button (¥, REC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 25, 57
DVD/VHS POWER on/off button (Í/I, POWER). . . . . . . l 18
≥To switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa.
In the standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small
amount of power.
(7) IN2 input terminals (IN2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 57
(8) DVD-SEARCH, VHS-REW/FF buttons (V/6, 5/W)
(9) Channel up/down buttons (CH, X, W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 38
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(14)
(10) DVD/VHS/SD drive indicator
≥Lights when the DVD, VHS or SD drive is selected.
(11) DRIVE SELECT button
≥Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
(12) SD card slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 11
(13) Connector for a digital video (DV) camcorder. . . . . . . . l 57
(14) One Touch Transfer (copying) operation button
≥From VHS to DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 50
≥From DVD to VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 52
The unit’s display
[A]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Common to DVD/VHS/SD
[A] Recording mode indicator
DVD:
XP, SP, LP, EP: (l 26)
XP SP LP EP (all on): FR mode (l 29)
VHS:
SP, LP°, EP, VP: (l 26)
° Playback only
[B] TV indicator
≥The indicator lights during the TV mode and it goes out during
the VCR mode. You can switch the mode by using [VCR/TV].
(l 23)
[C] Main display
≥Current time
≥Disc recording and play counter
≥VHS recording and play counter
≥Transfer (Copying) messages
≥Miscellaneous messages, etc.
(1)
[B]
(2)
[C]
(3)
(1)
VHS
(1) Scheduled recording indicator ( ) (l 30)
On:
When a scheduled recording program is registered and
recordable tape is inserted.
Flashes:
The scheduled recording indicator flashes when the unit cannot
go to scheduled recording standby (e.g. there is no tape, etc).
(2) Tape indicator
(3) Tape operation status
DVD
(1) Scheduled recording indicator ( ) (l 30)
On:
When a scheduled recording program is registered and a
recordable disc is inserted.
Flashes:
The scheduled recording indicator flashes when the unit cannot
go to scheduled recording standby (e.g. there is no disc, etc).
(2) Disc operation status
(3) Disc indicator
SD
(1) SD Card indicator
13
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 14 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
STEP 1 Connection
This section includes diagrams of two common methods of connection (A-B, pages 14 to 15). Please connect using the one that best
suits you.
≥Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about connection methods. (This is in English only.)
http://www.panasonic.com/consumer_electronics/dvd_recorder/dvd_connection.asp
≥Before doing any connection, turn off all the equipments and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Peripheral equipments and optional cables are sold separately unless otherwise indicated.
≥You need to subscribe to a cable TV service to enjoy viewing their programme.
≥Consult your service provider regarding appropriate cable box.
∫ Do not connect the unit through a video cassette
recorder
∫ The unit’s RF OUT terminal
The picture and sound signal from this unit go through the RF OUT
terminal to the television.
Refer to page 15 if the antenna connector doesn’t match.
Video signals sent through video cassette recorders will be
affected by copyright protection systems and the picture will not be
shown correctly on the TV.
∫ When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household AC outlet. This unit
consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
(approx. 8 W).
A
TV
TV
The unit
VCR
VCR
The unit
Connection with a television
∫ Connection (with Audio/Video cable)
Connect in numerical order 1 to 4.
∫ Connection (without Audio/Video cable)
You do not need to connect “3”.
≥After this connection, set the RF output channel “OFF” (l 18),
and then press TV/VIDEO button of TV remote controller to
select the AV input mode to the connected TV terminal. You can
watch a video from this unit on your TV.
The unit supplies a signal to the TV via the 75 ≠ coaxial cable on
channel 3 or 4. It is possible to view the video picture on your TV in
the same way that you watch TV broadcasts.
≥After this connection, set the RF output channel “CH3” or “CH4”
(l 18).
Television
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
Cable from wall or
antenna signal
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
This unit’s rear panel
Audio/Video cable
(Included)
3
2
75 h
coaxial
cable
(Included)
75 h
coaxial
cable
1
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
To household
AC outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
To
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
Y
PB
PR
RF
IN
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
AV OUT
To RF IN
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
RF
OUT
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VHF/UHF
To RF OUT
4
AC power supply cord (Included)
Connect only after all other connections are complete.
14
RQTV0141
B
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Connection with a television and cable box or satellite receiver
Television
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
Cable from wall or
antenna signal
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
75 h
coaxial
cable
Audio/Video cable
(Included)
This unit’s rear panel
5
STEP 1 Connection
M6VP&PC.book 15 ページ
2
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
To household
AC outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
To
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
Y
PB
RF
IN
PR
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
To RF IN
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
RF
OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
R-AUDIO-L
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VHF/UHF
To IN1
7
Audio/Video cable
AC power supply cord (Included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
To RF OUT
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
6
Satellite antenna
(Satellite receiver only)
4 3
75 h
coaxial
cable
(Included)
Cable box or
Satellite receiver
IN
Satellite Cable
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
OUT
AUDIO
R
L VIDEO S VIDEO
RF
1
75 h
coaxial
cable
If the antenna connector doesn’t match
Use one of the following connections to suit the antenna lead to the unit’s RF IN terminal, and the 75 ≠ coaxial cable to the antenna terminals on
the equipment (television etc.). Refer to other equipment’s operating instructions.
Other antenna connections to the unit
Other antenna connections to the television
∫ A single twin lead
∫ A twin lead terminal
from the antenna
300–75 ≠ transformer
(Flat) Twin lead
300 ≠ cable
To this unit’s RF IN
terminal
∫ A twin lead and a coaxial cable
75–300 ≠ transformer
VHF or UHF
75 ≠ coaxial cable
Television
∫ A twin lead and coaxial plug terminal
from the antenna
VHF/UHF band separator
VHF/UHF band mixer
(Flat) Twin lead 300 ≠ cable
75 ≠ coaxial cable
(Round)75 ≠ coaxial cable
VHF
UHF
Television
To this unit’s RF IN
terminal
∫ Two twin leads
∫ Two twin lead terminals
from the antenna
VHF/UHF band separator
VHF/UHF band mixer
(Flat) Twin lead
300 ≠ cable
75 ≠ coaxial cable
UHF
Television
To this unit’s RF
IN terminal
300–75 ≠ transformer
VHF
DVD output and DVD/VHS output
The unit has DVD/VHS COMMON output terminals and DVD PRIORITY output terminals.
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
≥For DVD/VHS COMMON output terminals, both DVD and VHS
signals can be output.
DVD/VHS COMMON output
Y
PB
PR
DVD PRIORITY OUT
≥You can also playback a tape with the DVD PRIORITY output
terminal except while recording, or making a scheduled recording,
on the DVD.
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
VIDEO
S VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
R-AUD
15
v
DVD PRIORITY output
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 16 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
STEP 1 Connection
To enjoy higher picture quality
∫ Connecting to the TV S VIDEO IN terminal
∫ Connecting to the TV COMPONENT VIDEO
IN terminals
S VIDEO OUT terminal
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
After completing “Connection with a television” (l 14) or
“Connection with a television and cable box or satellite receiver”
(l 15), connect S VIDEO cable as illustration below.
Usually you can watch a picture from INPUT2 terminal. When you
want to playback VHS while recording on DVD, change to INPUT1
terminal.
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal
These terminals can be used for either interlace or progressive
output (l 76) and provide a purer picture than the S VIDEO OUT
terminal.
After completing “Connection with a television” (l 14) or
“Connection with a television and cable box or satellite receiver”
(l 15), connect COMPONENT VIDEO cable as illustration below.
Usually you can watch a picture from COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
terminal. When you want to playback VHS while recording on DVD,
change to INPUT1 terminal.
≥Connect to terminals of the same color.
Audio/Video cable
(Included)
Television
Red White Yellow
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
INPUT1
Television
INPUT2
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
IN
R
L
IN
Red White
This unit’s
rear panel
PB
Y
INPUT1
Red White
AUDIO IN
R
L
COMPONENT
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
PR
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
Component
Video cable
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
Y
PB
PR
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
Audio/Video
udio/Video
cable
le (Included)
ca
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
PB
Y
PR
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
VIDEO
S VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
This unit’s
rear panel
Red White
Audio cable
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
Connecting an amplifier or system component
∫ Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal
≥To enjoy multi-channel surround on DVD-Video,
connect an amplifier with a built-in decoder
displaying these logo marks using an optical digital
audio cable and change the settings in “Digital Audio
Output” (l 64).
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not
included), check the terminal shape of the connected
equipment.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
≥Even if using this connection, output will be only
2 channels when playing DVD-Audio.
∫ Connection to a stereo amplifier
Amplifier’s
rear panel
OPTICAL IN
AUDIO IN
R L
Red White
Insert fully, with this side
facing up.
Optical digital audio cable
Do not bend sharply when
connecting.
This unit’s
rear panel
Audio cable
Red White
Y
PB
PR
RF
IN
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
16
RQTV0141
VIDEO
S Video cable
Red White
Amplifier’s
rear panel
R-AUDIO-L
AC IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
RF
OUT
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VHF/UHF
Audio cable
S VIDEO
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) terminal
HDMI is the next-generation interface for digital devices. When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video
signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High
Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080i or 720p HD video.
Set the following:
From the Setup menu (l 65), Set “HDMI Video Output” and “HDMI Audio Output” to “On”.
≥Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
∫ Connecting to a TV
∫ Connecting to an amplifier
Television
Television
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
(Only included in DMR-ES46V)
Please use a cable
5.0 m or less in length for
stability and prevention of
deterioration in video quality.
This Unit
Y
STEP 1 Connection
M6VP&PC.book 17 ページ
HDMI IN
Amplifier
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
PB
HDMI AV OUT
COMPONE
AV OUT
This Unit
DIGITAL A
(PCM/BIT
≥If connecting to equipment incompatible with CPPM (Content
Protection for Prerecorded Media, l 76), copy-protected DVD-Audio
cannot be output through the HDMI terminal. Connect the audio cables
(red, white) to the corresponding audio input terminals.
≥If you are connecting to equipment that is only compatible with
2 channel output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed
(l 76) and output as 2 channels. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI
input terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display property or at all when
connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
HDMI AV OUT
Y
PB
PR
DVD/
R-AUDIO-L
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
D
≥If the speaker setup cannot be completed on the amplifier, then
use the “HDMI Connection Speakers Setting” setting (l 65).
≥If connecting to equipment incompatible with CPPM (Content
Protection for Prerecorded Media, l 76), copy-protected DVD-Audio
cannot be output through the HDMI terminal. Connect to the amplifier
with an optical digital cable or audio cables (red and white).
Control with HDMI (HDAVI Control)
If connecting with a Panasonic television equipped with the HDAVI Control function, you can use this convenient function to control both the
recorder and the television.
After connecting the unit to a television using an HDMI cable, set “Ctrl with HDMI” to “On”. (l 65)
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m/4.9 ft.), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m/9.8 ft.), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m/16.4 ft.), etc.
≥Depending on the cable used, this function may not be possible.
For the connection to be completed and activate correctly, turn on all HDAVI Control compatible equipment and select this unit’s input
channel on the connected television. Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.
Automatic input switching
When the following operations are performed the television will
automatically switch the input channel and displays the
corresponding action.
- When play starts on the unit
- When an action that uses the display screen is performed (e.g.,
Direct Navigator screen, schedule recording screen)
Note
≥When the unit is recording on the DVD drive, the output does not
automatically switch even if when you operate the VHS.
For your reference
≥When [1, PLAY] is pressed on this unit for “automatic input
switching” or “power on link”, the playback is not immediately
displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the
contents from where playback starts.
In this case, press [:, SKIP] or [6, SLOW/SEARCH] to go
back to where playback started.
≥When the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (Optical) terminal is used for audio
output and the unit is connected to the television with a HDMI cable,
set “HDMI Audio Output” to “Off” in the setup menu. (l 65)
Power on link
The television automatically turns on and the corresponding display
appears when the following operations are performed with the
television in standby mode.
- When play starts on the unit
- When an action that uses the display screen is performed (e.g.,
Direct Navigator screen, schedule recording screen)
Note
≥When the unit is recording on the DVD drive, the television does
not automatically turn on even if when you operate the VHS.
Power off link
When the television is turned off, this unit is also automatically turned off.
The unit automatically turns off even if the FUNCTIONS screen, the
status message or the on-screen menu is displayed, during
playback or when the unit is only scheduled recording.
Note
≥Even if the television is turned off, the unit will not turn off at the
same time in the following conditions:
- When you pressed [¥, REC] and the unit is recording
- When copying
- When finalizing
Equipment compatible with and equipment scheduled to be
compatible with HDAVI Control (as of January 2006).
Plasma TVs: TH-42/50/58PX600, TH-37/42/50PX60,
TH-58PX60,TH-42PD60, TH-42/50PX6
LCD TVs:
TC-26/32LX600, TC-23/26/32LX60, TC-26/32LE60
LCD projection TVs:
PT-52/56/61LCX66
Receiver:
SA-XR57P
¢ The HDAVI Control function will only work if you can connect this
unit with Panasonic equipment equipped with the HDAVI control
function.
Before purchasing equipment, confirm that it has the HDAVI
Control function.
17
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 18 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
STEP 2 Plug-in Auto Tuning
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
Í
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
Numeric
buttons
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
ADD/DLT
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
CH,
ADD/DLT
DELETE
RESET
STOP
CH, W, X
CH
AUDIO
A
REC
CableTV Mode
(Cable)
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
Band
VHF
UHF
VHF
CATV LOW BAND
CATV MID/SUPER BAND
CATV HYPER BAND
Channel
2 to 13
14 to 69
2 to 13
95 to 99
14 to 36
37 to 65
66 to 94
100 to 125
1
ULTRA BAND
SPECIAL CATV CHANNEL
Regarding DST (Daylight Saving Time) (l 19)
Legal revision is expected to change the DST period in 2007.
When you use the unit with DST on, the change may cause the
unit’s clock to go behind the actual time. Check the DST setting in
Set Clock manually in the Setup menu, set DST off and reset the
clock precisely if you are using this function.
Preparation
≥Turn on the TV and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to the unit. (Example: AV input, CH3 or CH4)
≥If you connect the unit through a cable box or satellite receiver
(l 15), tune to your local PBS for Auto Clock Setting to work.
If there is no local PBS, set the clock manually (l 19, “Set Clock
Manually”).
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER].
[2] Press [CH, W, X] to
select an RF output
channel number.
Select Language
Seleccione el idioma
Sélection de Langue
English
Connection (without Audio/
Video cable):
Select “CH3” or “CH4” which
displays the screen on the right.
Connection (with Audio/Video
cable):
Select “OFF”.
18
RQTV0141
The unit can be turned on faster, in about
1 second. Please note that Quick Start
mode slightly increases power
consumption when the unit is off.
(See Operation instructions for details)
Turn Quick Start on ?
On
ENTER
CM SKIP
After plugging the unit into your household AC outlet and pressing
[Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on for the first time, the unit
assists you to set the on-screen language, and automatically tunes
in all the channels it can receive and sets the clock.
The unit automatically determines the type of transmission (airwaves
or cable) and puts them into channels as follows.
Antenna Mode
(Airwaves)
ENTER
Quick start setting
PLAY
R
DIRECT NAVIGATO
SUB MENU
4:3 TV
16:9 Widescreen TV
Off
TIONS
FU N C
µ
ENTER
If you activate “Quick Start”
function, select “On”.
Aspect Ratio Selection
Select TV type and press ENTER.
(Please refer to Operation Instruction
for details)
FF
SCHEDULE
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
[3] Use [3, 4] to select the
language and press
[ENTER].
[4] Press [3, 4] to select
“4:3 TV” or “16:9
Widescreen TV” and
press [ENTER].
[5] Press [3, 4] to select
“On” or “Off” and press
[ENTER].
Español
Français
Press ENTER
Pulse ENTER
Appuyer sur ENTER
The unit’s display
The unit’s display
Each time you press the button:
CH 3 (Default setting) (# CH4 (# OFF
^-----------------------------------------------J
About “Quick Start” function
If you set Quick Start to on, you can start recording to DVDRAM about 1 second after you press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER]
to turn the unit on and then sequentially press [¥, REC].
The following happens when you have selected “On”.
≥Power consumption in standby mode increases because
power is supplied to the unit.
[6] Press [3, 4] to select
“Internal TV Tuner” or
“Input” and press
[ENTER].
When you do not set channels
on this unit, select “Input”. The
unit then displays “Set Clock
Manually” screen.
Set the clock manually. (l 19)
Default Recording Source
Please select the source from which this
unit will record each time it is turned
on. Note: Selecting "Internal TV Tuner"
will start the Auto Channel Clock
Settings process.
This one time process takes a few minutes.
Internal TV Tuner
Input
ENTER
[7] Press [ENTER] to start Plug-in Auto Tuning.
≥The unit then proceeds with Auto Clock Setting. The time is
displayed when Auto Clock Setting is finished.
Set Channels Automatically
Ch.
1
Set Channels Automatically
Proceeding . . .
1 1 1
Set Clock Automatically
Auto Clock Setting is complete.
4/4/2007 12:15 AM
DST-------------- On
Time Zone------- CST
≥DST, Daylight Saving Time, shows the summertime setting.
≥Time Zone shows the time difference from Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
EST (Eastern Standard Time) l GMT j5
CST (Central Standard Time) l GMT j6
MST (Mountain Standard Time)l GMT j7
PST (Pacific Standard Time) l GMT j8
AST (Alaska Standard Time) l GMT j9
HST (Hawaii Standard Time) l GMT j10
For other areas: xx hr
∫When one of the following screens appears
“No channels were found.”
Set Channels Automatically
After turning off the unit, confirm
following and perform setup
No channels were found.
Please check antenna or cable connection,
again.
then...
≥Confirm the antenna cable is
firmly connected to RF IN
Press ENTER again.
terminal.
≥If you do not set channels on this unit, select “Input” in step 6.
“Auto Clock Setting is
Set Clock Automatically
incomplete.”
Press [ENTER] and set clock
Auto Clock setting is incomplete.
manually. (l 19)
[8] Press [ENTER].
Press ENTER
to set clock manually.
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
∫ If the clock is an hour slower or faster than the actual
time
Select “j1” or “i1” in “Adjust Time Zone” in the Setup menu (l 63).
STEP 2 Plug-in Auto Tuning
M6VP&PC.book 19 ページ
∫ Adding and deleting channels
Add or delete channels if necessary channels are not set or
unnecessary channels are set.
[1] Press the numeric buttons to select a channel.
∫ Restart Plug-in Auto Tuning
(after relocation, for example)
Antenna Mode (Airwaves)
e.g.,
“5”:
[0] )[5]
“15”:
[1] )[5]
CableTV Mode (Cable)
e.g.,
“5”:
[0] )[0] )[5]
“15”:
[0] )[1] )[5]
“115”:
[1] )[1] )[5]
Signal source, RF output channel, channel caption revert to the
default values when you perform the procedure below.
Scheduled recording settings are also cleared.
When the unit is on and stopped
[1] Press and hold [CH, W]
and [CH, X] on the main
unit for about 5 seconds.
The unit turns off.
The unit’s display
≥You can also use [CH, X, W] to select a channel.
[2] Press [CH, ADD/DLT].
e.g., The channel is deleted.
[2] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.
Plug-in Auto Tuning starts.
Channel 15 Deleted
∫ Restart Set Channels Automatically
[1]
∫ Set Clock Manually
“Clock Settings” made here are applied to VHS as well.
While stopped
[1]
Press [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
No Disc
No Disc
Program
Copy
Other Functions
Setup
ENTER
RETURN
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
FUNCTIONS
No Disc
No Disc
Program
Setup
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
[3] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
Quick Start
On
Restore Default Settings
[4] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
[5] Select “Clock Settings” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[6] Select “Set Clock Manually” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
Set Clock Manually
Signal Source (RF IN)
Antenna
Set Channels Automatically
Month
1
Channel Captions
Preset Channel Captions
Manual Channel Captions
Day
/
1
/
Year
Hour
2000 SAT
12
Minute
:
00 PM
DST
Time Zone
Off
EST
ENTER
[4] Select “Channel” with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
[5] Select “Signal Source (RF IN)” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
Setup
Signal Source (RF IN)
Channel
Setup
Disc
Cable TV
Antenna
[6] Select “Antenna” or “Cable TV” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Set Channels Automatically” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[8] Press [ENTER].
≥Auto Channel Setting starts. This takes a few minutes.
[9] Press [ENTER].
Off Timer
6 Hours
Remote Control Code Set Code 1
Clock Settings
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
VHS
[7] Use [2, 1] to select the item you want to
change, and press [3, 4] to change the setting.
≥DST (Daylight Saving Time): On or Off
If you select “On”, the clock is advanced one hour starting at
2 a.m. on the first Sunday in April and ending at 2 a.m. on the
last Sunday in October.
≥Time Zone (l 22)
[8] Press [ENTER].
≥The clock starts.
≥When you change the time zone, the recording times for titles
recorded before the time zone adjustment also change to
correspond to the new time zone.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To cancel in the middle
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
19
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 20 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Other settings
∫ Manual Channel Captions
TRACKING/V-LOCK
DVD/VHS
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Channel captions”.
POWER
[5] Select “Manual Channel Captions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the channel and press [1].
POWER
Í
VOLUME
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
≥Channels are only displayed if they contain a station and if
preset captions have not been added.
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
RESET
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
TIME SLIP/ JET
0REW SELECT
Numeric
buttons
RESET
≥You can choose from the following characters:
A to Z, 0 to 9, -, &, !, /, (space)
≥To delete the caption, press [¢, CANCEL].
≥Repeat this step to enter the other characters.
DELETE
REW
TIONS
FU N C
R
DIRECT NAVIGATO
FF
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
[7] Use [3, 4] to select the first character and
press [1].
ADD/DLT
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
SCHEDULE
SKIP/INDEX
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
CH
Setup
FUNCTIONS
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
VHS
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
Channel captions
Manual Channel Captions
Channel Number
Caption
6
8
-------
10
AAAA
12
23
-------
ENTER
You can use the preset captions, or manually enter new ones
yourself.
The captions you enter are used as channel names and displayed
on the Direct Navigator screen.
[8] Use [2, 1] to return to the “Channel Number”
column.
[1]
[9] Press [ENTER].
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
[4] Select “Channel” with
[3, 4] and press [2, 1].
≥Go to the item you want to set
next.
FUNCTIONS
No Disc
No Disc
∫ To return to the previous screen
Program
Press [RETURN].
Setup
Copy
∫ To exit the screen
Other Functions
Press [RETURN].
ENTER
RETURN
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
Signal Source (RF IN)
Antenna
Set Channels Automatically
Channel Captions
Preset Channel Captions
Manual Channel Captions
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Channel captions”.
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
VHS
Selecting television type
You do not have to change the setting when connected to a 4:3
standard aspect TV that is not compatible with progressive output.
(l 76)
[1]
∫ Preset Channel Captions
[5] Select “Preset Channel
Captions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the
caption and press [1].
≥Repeat steps 6 to 8 to enter other channels.
Preset Channel Captions
Caption
Channel Number
GLOB
--
ABC
--
PBS
CBS
---
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[4] Select “TV Screen” with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
[5] Select “TV Type” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
4:3 TV
You can choose from the
following captions.
ABC, PBS, CBS, CNN, FOX,
ESPN, NBC, HBO, A&E, AMC, FAM, MAX, MTV, SHOW, TBS,
USA, TNT, CBC, UPN, CTV, WB, TSN, DSC, GLOB
≥When selecting the caption, press and hold [3, 4] to scroll up
and down the screen quickly.
≥Channels are displayed only when they contain a station and if
captions have not been added manually.
≥To delete the channel number, press [¢, CANCEL].
≥Repeat steps 6 and 7 as necessary.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
VHS
ENTER
[7] Use [3, 4] to select the channel corresponding
to the caption and press [2].
[8] Press [ENTER].
RQTV0141
Aspect 4:3 & 480i
Aspect 4:3 & 480p
16:9 Aspect (Widescreen TV)
Aspect 16:9 & 480i
Aspect 16:9 & 480p
ENTER
≥Aspect 4:3/Aspect 16:9:
4:3
4:3 standard aspect TV
16:9
16:9 widescreen TV
≥480p/480i:
Select “480p” if the TV is compatible with progressive output.
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the item and press
[ENTER].
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
20
TV Type
Setup
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Television operation
To turn the TV on/off, change the TV input mode, select the TV
channel and change the TV volume by means of this remote control,
set the remote control as follows.
Point the remote control at the TV
While pressing [Í, POWER TV], enter the code
using the numeric buttons.
e.g., 0250: press [0] > [2] > [5] > [0].
Manufacturer and Code No.
Panasonic
0051, 0250
National
QUASAR
Change the remote control code on the main unit and on the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together. When changing the remote control code, make sure
the two codes are same.
Use “1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
[1]
While stopped
FUNCTIONS
No Disc
No Disc
PHILIPS (RC-5) 0054
RCA
0047
SAMSUNG
0060, 0587,
0702
0154
FISHER
0154
SANYO
GE
0047
SHARP
0093, 0165
GOLDSTAR
0178, 0317,
0457
SONY
0000
HITACHI
0145
SYLVANIA
0054
JVC
0053
THOMSON
0047
LG
0178, 0317,
0457
TOSHIBA
0156
ZENITH
0017
MAGNAVOX 0054
When other Panasonic products
respond to this remote control
Other settings
M6VP&PC.book 21 ページ
MITSUBISHI 0150
≥Test by turning on the TV and changing channels. Repeat the
procedure until you find the code that allows correct operation.
≥If your TV brand is not listed or if the code listed for your TV does
not allow control of your TV, this remote control is not compatible
with your TV.
[2]
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
ENTER
Select “Setup” with [3,
RETURN
4] and press [ENTER].
Select “Setup” with [3,
4] and press [2, 1].
Select “Remote Control Code” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
Use [3, 4] to select the code (1, 2 or 3) and
press [ENTER].
Program
Setup
Copy
Other Functions
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
≥The code on the unit has been set.
[7] While pressing [ENTER], press and hold for
about 2 seconds the numeric button ([1], [2] or
[3]) corresponding to the code you selected in
step 6.
≥The code on the remote control has been set.
[8] Press [ENTER].
∫ When the following indicator appears on the unit’s
display
The unit’s remote control code
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
code (l step 7).
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
21
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 22 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Other settings
≥Time Zone shows the time difference from Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
EST (Eastern Standard Time) l GMT j5
CST (Central Standard Time) l GMT j6
MST (Mountain Standard Time) l GMT j7
PST (Pacific Standard Time) l GMT j8
AST (Alaska Standard Time) l GMT j9
HST (Hawaii Standard Time) l GMT j10
For other areas: xx hr
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
VOLUME
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
CH, W, X
CH
[8] Press [ENTER].
ADD/DLT
CH
∫ To cancel in the middle
DELETE
Press [RETURN].
SLOW/SEARCH
FF
REW
SKIP/INDEX
STOP
PAUSE
∫ Adjust Time Zone
PLAY
CM SKIP
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Clock Settings”.
TIONS
FU N C
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
Adjust the time zone (j1 or i1) if it was not set correctly with auto
clock setting.
You can set this menu only after “Set Clock Automatically” is
completed.
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
VCR/TV
Clock Settings
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
“Clock Settings” made here are applied to VHS as well.
[1]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
No Disc
No Disc
Program
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[4] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
VHS
Off Timer
6 Hours
Remote Control Code Set Code 1
Clock Settings
Quick Start
On
Restore Default Settings
[5] Select “Clock Settings” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
∫ Set Clock Automatically
[6] Select “Set Clock Automatically” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[7] Press [ENTER].
≥Auto setting starts. This can take some time, up to a few hours
in some cases. The following screen appears when setting is
complete.
Set Clock Automatically
Auto Clock Setting is complete.
4/4/2007
11:15 AM
DST------------------ On
Time Zone--------- CST
22
RQTV0141
[6] Select “Adjust Time
Zone” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[7] Select “j1” or “i1”
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
≥If the time was not set correctly, use manual clock setting or
time zone adjust.
≥DST, (Daylight Saving Time) shows the summertime setting.
Adjust Time Zone
j1
0
i1
Removing Interference
Connection (without Audio/Video cable) only
In some cases, interference (lines or patterning) or a very poor
picture may appear on the TV when the DVD Recorder is
connected. If this happens, follow the steps below to change
the video playback channel (RF output channel) to remove the
interference.
[1] Press [FUNCTIONS] for
more than 5 seconds.
The RF output channel number is
displayed on the unit display.
[2] Press [CH, W, X] to
select a channel number
(CH3 or CH4).
The unit’s display
Each time you press the button:
CH 3 (Default setting) (# CH4 (# OFF
^-----------------------------------------------J
≥Set the RF output channel of the DVD Video Recorder to
“OFF” (RF OFF) when the DVD Video Recorder is connected
to the TV via the Audio/Video cable.
[3] Press [ENTER] to finish this setting.
∫ When you set the RF output channel to “CH3” or
“CH4”
A picture is output on CH3 or CH4 from RF output.
Press [VCR/TV] to switch the mode from TV to VCR, and vice
versa.
≥When the TV mode is selected, the “TV” indicator lights on the
unit’s display and you can watch TV.
≥When the “TV” indicator does not light on, then VCR mode is
selected and you can watch images from the unit.
23
RQTV0141
Recording television programs
DVD/VHS
The surface on which
you can see a roll of
tape should face up,
POWER
POWER
Í
DRIVE SELECT
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
VOLUME
Insert a video
cassette.
TRACKING/V-LOCK
Numeric
buttons
∫
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
PAUSE
FF
PLAY
;
SCHEDULE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
For remote control
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select VHS side and then press and
hold [∫, STOP] for about 3 or more seconds.
SUB MENU
µ
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
STATUS
REC MODE
, EJECT
, OPEN/CLOSE
Inserting discs
[1] Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to
open the tray.
≥You can insert a cartridge or non-cartridge disc.
[2] Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to
close the tray.
≥If you insert a DVD-RAM with the write-protect tab set to
“PROTECT” (l 60), play starts automatically.
Notes
≥A double-sided disc should be loaded with the side you want to
record/play facing down.
≥It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a doublesided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it
over.
≥When using 8 cm (3q) DVD-RAM or 8 cm (3q) DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
24
RQTV0141
≥You can eject a video cassette even when the unit is in standby
mode. It switches back to standby once it ejects the video
cassette.
For main unit
≥Press [<, EJECT] on the main unit.
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
≥The unit is
automatically turned
on.
∫ To eject a video
cassette
DELETE
RESET
STOP
CH, W, X
[+RW]
≥The created title menu is deleted when recording on the disc.
Create the title menu again by using “Create DVD Top Menu” in
DVD Management. (l 62)
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Recording procedures
[6] Press [¥, REC] to start recording.
Recording television programs
M6VP&PC.book 25 ページ
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
≥You can record up to 99 titles on a disc.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥You can record up to 49 titles on a disc.
≥It is not possible to record digital broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL,
+RW or 8 cm (3q) DVD-RAM discs. Use a CPRM compatible DVDRAM.
≥Recording will take place on open space on the disc. Data will not
be overwritten.
≥If there is no space left on the recording disc, you will need to
erase unwanted titles (l 41, 59) or use a new disc.
When recording to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL or +RW
≥When recording MTS broadcasts
- If you do not connect a cable box
Select “Main” or “SAP” in “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in
the Setup menu (l 64).
- If you connect a cable box
Select “Main” or “SAP” on the cable box.
≥The aspect ratio of the recorded image will be 4:3.
≥To play a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R or +R DL recorded using this unit on another playback
source, the disc must first be finalized (l 61).
≥[+RW] To enable play on other DVD equipment, please use
“Create DVD Top Menu” in DVD Management menu (l 62).
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l 60, cartridge l 60). [RAM]
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
≥Select an audio type you want to record. (l 27)
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.
[2] Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive you
want to record on (DVD or VHS).
[3] Insert a disc. (l 24)
≥When using a DVD-RAM for the first time with the unit, format
it to ensure accurate recording (l 61, “Deleting all contents of
a disc or card –Format”).
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording. You can change them while recording is paused,
but the material is recorded as a separate title.
∫ To pause recording
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart recording.)
≥Title is not split into separate titles. [DVD]
≥You can also press [¥, REC] to restart recording.
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫, STOP].
≥Recorded as 1 title until the position where stopped. [DVD]
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to complete recording
management information after recording finishes.
∫ To show the remaining time
[DVD]
Press [STATUS] several times. (l 40)
[VHS]
[1] Select “Select Tape Length” from the Setup and select the
corresponding tape length. (l 65)
[2] Press [STATUS] several times.
The remaining tape time may not be displayed correctly depending
on the tape used.
Notes
≥Even if the video cassette you use is labeled “S-VHS”, it is not
possible to record in the S-VHS system with the unit. It
records in the normal VHS system. [VHS]
≥When recording is paused for 5 or more minutes, the unit returns
to stop mode. [VHS]
≥The remaining tape time is only displayed during playback or
recording. [VHS]
or
Insert a video cassette with an intact accidental
erasure prevention tab. (l 24)
[4] Press [CH, W, X] to select the channel.
≥To select with the numeric buttons:
Antenna Mode (Airwaves)
e.g.,
“5”:
[0] )[5]
“15”:
[1] )[5]
CableTV Mode (Cable)
e.g.,
“5”:
[0] )[0] )[5]
“15”:
[0] )[1] )[5]
“115”:
[1] )[1] )[5]
[5] Press [REC MODE] to select the recording
mode.
Remaining time on the disc
[DVD]
XP, SP, LP or EP
[VHS]
SP, EP or VP
25
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 26 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Recording television programs
XP
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
SP
DRIVE SELECT
VOLUME
Picture quality
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
∫
STOP
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
PLAY
CM SKIP
FR (Flexible Recording mode l 29):
≥You can set FR mode when transferring (copying) or programming
scheduled recordings.
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
AUDIO
µ
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
RETURN
∫ Recording modes (VHS)
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
Recording mode
F Rec
SP: You can record the length shown on the tape.
EP: 3 times the length of SP mode.
VP: 5 times the length of SP mode.
∫ Recording modes and approximate
recording times (DVD)
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may
become shorter than indicated.
DVD-RAM
1
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R, +RW
(4.7 GB)
Single-sided
(4.7 GB)
Double-sided°
(9.4 GB)
XP (High quality)
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
SP (Normal)
2 hours
4 hours
2 hours
LP
(Long recording)
4 hours
8 hours
4 hours
EP (Extra long
recording)
8 hours
(6 hours°2)
16 hours
(12 hours°2)
8 hours
(6 hours°2)
FR (Flexible
Recording)
8 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
for one side
8 hours
maximum
DVD-R DL, +R DL°3 (8.5 GB)
First layer
XP (High quality)
26
Second layer
55 minutes
50 minutes
SP (Normal)
1 hour 50 minutes
1 hour 40 minutes
LP
(Long recording)
3 hours 40 minutes
3 hours 20 minutes
EP (Extra long
recording)
7 hours 25 minutes
(5 hours 30 minutes°2)
6 hours 50 minutes
(5 hours 15 minutes°2)
7 hours 25 minutes
maximum
6 hours 50 minutes
maximum
FR (Flexible
Recording)
This unit uses variable bit rate (VBR) recording which varies the
amount of data recorded to suit the images, so actual recording
times and remaining recording times shown by the unit will be
different. (The difference will be especially noticeable with DVDR DL and +R DL.)
Use a disc with plenty of remaining time to be sure.
°1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of
a double sided disc to the other.
°2 When “Recording Time in EP Mode” has been set to “EP (6H)”
in the Setup menu. (l 64)
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6H)” than when
using “EP (8H)”.
°3 It is not possible to record continuously from first layer to second
layer.
RQTV0141
EP (8H)
Note
When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8H) mode, play may not be
possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this
case use EP (6H) mode.
FF
SCHEDULE
2, 1
ENTER
EP (6H)°2
Recording time
DELETE
RESET
LP
≥To have a longer recording capacity, select “EP” or “VP”.
≥If the image quality is important to you or if you wish to store the
tape for a long period, select “SP”.
≥The unit can play tapes recorded in LP mode on other equipment
(“LP” lights on the unit’s display).
VP mode:
≥A tape recorded in VP mode by the unit cannot be played
back by other VCRs. It is recommended to distinguish it from
other tapes by writing “VP” on the tape label, etc.
≥It takes more time for automatic tracking to work when playing
tapes recorded with VP mode, and it may not work at all with
some tapes. Do tracking manually if this is the case (l 38).
Note
You cannot play VP recording on other equipment.
∫ Off Timer
Selecting audio to record
The unit automatically switches to standby when it has not been
used for about 6 hours.
You can turn this feature off or change the time to 2 hours.
(l 63, “Off Timer”)
∫ When the format confirmation screen is
displayed
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you insert a new disc and a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen might be displayed.
Format the disc to use it. However all the recorded contents are
deleted.
[RAM]
Press [AUDIO].
Stereo # SAP Audio # Mono
^-------------------------------------}
Stereo:
Main audio (stereo). If the broadcast is “Mono_SAP”,
audio will be monaural even if you select Stereo
mode.
SAP
Audio:
Secondary audio program (SAP). If recorded in SAP,
main audio is also recorded.
Mono:
Main audio (monaural). Select “Mono” if reception is
poor during a stereo broadcast.
Format
CH 12
This disc is not formatted properly.
Do you want to format the
disc in DVD Management?
Yes
No
ENTER
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥Several steps are necessary to format a disc. Refer to “Deleting all
contents of a disc or card –Format”. (l 61)
∫ When remove a recorded disc
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
When you press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit while stopped:
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
Make compatible for playback on other DVD players ( Finalize )
Finalizing is necessary to enable playback
of the disc on compatible DVD players.
Once finalized, titles cannot be added to the disc.
It will take approximately ٤ minutes. Start ?
≥If you change the sound setting while recording, the recorded
sound will also change.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Select the audio (Main or SAP) in “Multi-channel
TV sound (MTS)” in the Setup menu. (l 64)
Auto Bilingual Choice Function
[VHS]
When a stereo broadcast or SAP broadcast is recorded and played
back on the unit, stereo sound will be automatically selected in the
case of a stereo broadcast and SAP sound will be automatically
selected in the case of a dual-sound broadcast (Mono and SAP or
Stereo and SAP).
≥This function may not work properly if the program is played back
from a mid point. In a case like this, press [AUDIO] and select the
right sound.
≥The function will not work with a cassette which has been recorded
using external equipment.
Press “REC” to start finalizing.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to postpone
finalizing. The disc can be played only on
this unit. You can Finalize it later.
When finalizing the disc
Press [¥, REC].
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to provide the disc with a name or set play menu select,
select “Disc Name” (l 60) or “Playback will start with” (l 61) in
“DVD Management” before finalizing.
When opening the tray without disc finalization
Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
To specify a time to stop recording
–One Touch Recording
While recording
[1] Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive you
want to specify the time to stop recording
(DVD or VHS).
[2] Press [¥, REC] to select the recording time.
≥On the main unit, press [¥, REC].
The unit’s display
Each time you press the button:
Counter (Cancel) # OFF 0:30 # OFF 1:00 # OFF 1:30
^------- OFF 4:00 ! OFF 3:00 ! OFF 2:00 !----------}
For your reference
≥This does not work during scheduled recording or Flexible
Recording.
≥Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press
[∫, STOP].
≥The set time is cleared if you change the recording mode or
channel while recording is paused. [DVD]
27
RQTV0141
Recording television programs
[RAM]
Preparation
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
Hint
≥Sound is not output while fast-forwarding.
You can start play from the beginning of the title while continuing to
record it.
While recording or scheduled recording
Press [1, PLAY].
≥Play starts while recording proceeds.
For your reference
≥Play cannot be started until at least 2 seconds after recording
starts.
You can play a title previously recorded while you are recording
another title.
[1]
While recording or scheduled recording
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]. (l 32)
Playing DVD while recording VHS
You can play discs while VHS recording. The recording will not be
affected.
≥DVD playback (l 32)
For your reference
≥You cannot record on discs while VHS recording.
Playing VHS while recording DVD
You can play tapes while DVD recording. The recording will not be
affected.
≥VHS playback (l 37)
For your reference
≥You cannot record on tapes while DVD recording.
Watching the TV while recording
Preparation
≥Connection (without Audio/Video cable)
- Make sure that the TV indicator is lit on the unit’s display. If it is
not lit, press [VCR/TV] to light it.
≥Connection (with Audio/Video cable)
- Press [TV/VIDEO] to change the input mode to “TV”.
Press TV’s [CH, W, X] to select the desired TV
channel.
For your reference
≥You can also do this if the unit is making a scheduled recording.
≥The recording is unaffected.
28
RQTV0141
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title and press
[ENTER].
≥ Play starts while recording proceeds.
∫ To exit the Direct Navigator screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
For your reference
≥During simultaneous recording and play, you cannot edit or erase
titles with the Direct Navigator or playlists.
≥Even if you start play while the unit is on standby for scheduled
recording, recording starts when the time you set is reached.
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
The unit calculates a recording rate that enables the recording to fit
in the time you set (within the remaining time on the disc) with the
best picture quality.
Using “FLEXIBLE RECORDING” is convenient in these
kind of situations.
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting
an appropriate recording more difficult
≥When you want to record a long program with the best
picture quality possible
e.g., Recording a 90 minute program to disc
If you select XP mode, the program will not fit one disc.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
Recording television programs
M6VP&PC.book 29 ページ
A second disc is necessary for
30 minutes of the program.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
If you select SP mode, the program will fit one disc.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space
If you select “FLEXIBLE RECORDING” the
program will fit one disc perfectly.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
Preparation
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
≥Select the channel to record.
[1]
While stopped
Press [F Rec].
Flexible Recording
Record in FR mode.
Max recording time
Set recording time
Start
1 Hour 23 Min.
1 Hour 23 Min.
Cancel
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum
recording time in FR mode.
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and
press [3, 4] to set the recording time.
[3]
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
≥You cannot record for more than 8 hours.
When you want to start recording
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start” and press
[ENTER].
≥Recording starts.
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫, STOP].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS] several times. (l 40)
For your reference
≥During a Flexible Recording, all recording mode indicators light up
on the unit’s display.
≥It is not possible to change the channel or recording mode while
Flexible Recording is paused.
29
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 30 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Scheduled Recording
[2] Press [ENTER], to move and change the items
using [3, 4, 2, 1].
DVD/VHS
POWER
SCHEDULED
RECORDING
POWER
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
Numeric
buttons
Channel
STOP
REW
PAUSE
On
:
ADD/DLT
CH
CH,
ADD/DLT
DELETE
FF
CM SKIP
SCHEDULE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
F Rec
REC MODE
Cautions for using scheduled recording
on DVD and VHS
∫ Scheduled recording automatically starts at the set
time.
≥Scheduled recording can be started whether the unit is turned on
or off. When the unit is turned off, the sound and the video cannot
be outputted to the TV.
∫ Scheduled recording for TV programs cannot be
executed on both DVD and VHS at the same time.
Make sure the scheduled recording start times do not overlap on
both DVD and VHS Scheduled Recording List screens.
When the scheduled recording settings overlap:
≥When the start time of both scheduled recordings is the same, the
programme that you register later has priority.
≥If there is a VHS scheduled recording that overlaps a DVD
scheduled recording that is currently being recorded, it may not be
possible to operate the VHS during the overlap.
Programming scheduled recordings
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
You can enter up to 16 programs a month in advance.
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l 60, cartridge l 60) [RAM].
≥Insert a disc (l 24) and confirm there is sufficient empty space for
recording on it (l 40).
≥Check that the clock is set to the correct time.
≥When connecting a cable box or satellite receiver, select the
channel on the cable box or satellite receiver before scheduled
recording starts.
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].
≥Make sure “New Scheduled Recording” is selected.
Schedule
List
New Scheduled
Recording is
selected.
Remain
No Channel Date
01 4
5/ 6 Sat
Off
:
5/ 5 Fri 6:11 PM
Drive Mode
ENTER t
t
≥You may use the numeric buttons to enter “Channel”, “Date”,
“On”, and “Off”.
CH
SCHEDULE
RQTV0141
1:00 XP
:
Title Name
PLAY
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
30
Date
P
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
DVD
VHS
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
∫
VOLUME
Remain
DVD
VHS
1:00 XP
:
Off
Drive
On
6:10 PM 6:30 PM DVD
New Scheduled Recording
5/ 5 Fri 6:11 PM
Mode Check
XP
OK
≥Channel (Program Position/TV Station Name)
≥Date
You can also make a daily or weekly program.
Each daily or weekly program is counted as one program.
≥On (start time)/Off (finish time)
The time increases or decreases in 30-minute intervals if you
hold down the button.
≥Drive
You can select DVD or VHS drive.
You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
DVD,.VHS
≥Mode (Recording mode)
You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
[DVD] XP,.SP,.LP,.EP,.FR,.XP... (l 26)
[VHS] SP,.EP,.VP,.AUTO°,.SP... (l 26)
°Auto SP/EP mode (l 31)
≥Title Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Title Name” and press [ENTER]
(l 58).
[3] Press [ENTER] when you have finished making
changes.
≥“ ” lights on the unit’s display. (l 13)
≥“Invalid Entry” is displayed when you enter the wrong item.
Reenter the item.
≥Make sure that the scheduled recording has been
programmed correctly on the SCHEDULE LIST screen (l 31).
≥To continue programming:
Select “New Scheduled Recording” and repeat steps 2 to 3.
[4] Press [RETURN].
Notes
≥When the unit is carrying out a scheduled recording, you may
utilize playback.
≥When the disc or video cassette is removed, scheduled recording
standby is cancelled (the “ ” indicator goes out). You can put the
unit back on standby by inserting a recordable disc or video
cassette (the “ ” indicator comes on again).
≥When a video cassette is not inserted or a video cassette with no
accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted, the warning
message appears before the recording starts because scheduled
recording cannot be executed.
≥When recording more than one program in a row, for DVD-RAM
the first few seconds, and for DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R,
+R DL or +RW about the first 30 seconds of all programs from the
second one onwards will not be recorded.
≥Even if you set the Title Name on the scheduled recording screen,
it is not recorded on video cassette.
≥If you set “DST” (Daylight Saving Time) to “ON” when manually
setting the clock (l 19), scheduled recording may not work when
summer switches to winter and vice versa.
Preparation
≥Select the drive with the scheduled recording you want to cancel
by pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1]
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the scheduled
recording list by pressing [SCHEDULE].
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].
When unit is on
Press [∫, STOP].
≥Confirmation screen appears.
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and
press [ENTER].
≥Recording stops and the scheduled recording is deleted. (Daily
and weekly schedules remain and scheduled recording will
start as programmed.)
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the program and press
[SUB MENU].
[3] Press [3, 4] to select “Schedule set to Off” and
press [ENTER].
≥Cancelled icon is displayed in left column.
Icon explanations (A)
¥: Currently recording
W: Programs are overlapped. Recording of the program with the
later start time starts when the earlier program finishes
recording.
: Scheduled recording standby is cancelled. Recording will not
start at the scheduled time.
n: You stopped a weekly or daily scheduled recording. The icon
disappears when the next scheduled recording starts.
F: The disc was full. (not enough space)
: The TV program may not be recorded due to copy-protect. (disc)
X: Recording stopped (Dirty disc or tape, etc.)
Check (B)
OK:
Recordable (disc)
# (Date): The last day of daily or weekly recording. (disc)
!:
It may not be possible to record because:
≥the disc is write-protected.
≥
≥Be sure to select “Schedule set to On.” in step 3 before the
scheduled time to put the program on recording standby.
Note
≥When a scheduled recording program cannot start (no tape, etc.),
“Schedule set to On.” is cancelled one minute before the start time.
(If a daily or weekly scheduled recording program cannot start, the
following daily or weekly scheduled recording will not be affected.)
[VHS]
[VHS]
If, at the beginning of a scheduled recording, there is not enough
tape remaining to complete the recording, the SP/EP function will
automatically run the tape at EP speed for recording. This ensures
that the entire program will be recorded. If EP mode is not enough to
stretch the remaining tape to fit the whole program you will not be
able to record the whole TV program.
≥It is not possible to automatically activate VP mode.
≥The tape length must be set correctly. (l 65)
≥Some tapes may not work correctly.
≥If the recording mode changes from SP to EP during a scheduled
recording, some picture distortion occurs at that point.
31
RQTV0141
Playing discs
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
VOLUME
TV/VIDEO CH
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
0 SELECT
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
SKIP/INDEX
FF
REW
PAUSE
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
B
Preparation
≥Turn on the TV and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to the unit.
Playing discs
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.
Insert a disc. (l 24)
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Press [1, PLAY].
≥The disc tray closes and play begins.
(The unit takes some time to read the disc before play starts.)
≥Playback starts from the most recently recorded title.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Playback starts from the beginning of the disc.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
∫ To stop play
Press [∫, STOP].
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1, PLAY] to restart from this position.
≥Depending on the disc, resume play function may not be effective.
[VCD]
≥The stopped position is cleared when:
- You press [∫, STOP] several times.
- You open the tray.
- You turn the unit off. [DVD-A] [VCD] [CD]
≥The screen saver on the right may appear when
you stop play. Press [∫, STOP] again and you
can use the unit’s tuner to watch TV.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
∫ To pause play
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart play.)
Notes
≥The unit stops playing a disc when scheduled recording starts.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Press [1, PLAY] when you wish to start playing the disc while
recording (l 28, “Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording–Chasing playback”). [RAM]
32
RQTV0141
Note
≥ If “ ” appears on the TV, the operation is prohibited by the unit
or disc.
PLAY
SCHEDULE
A
Other buttons used to operate menus
Read the disc’s instructions for further details about operation.
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
[VCD]
Press the numeric buttons to select an item.
e.g.:
“5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select an item and press [ENTER].
≥You can sometimes use the numeric buttons to select an item.
[1] Press [DIRECT
NAVIGATOR].
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select the title you
want to watch and
press [ENTER].
≥Play starts.
≥You can also select titles by
entering a 2-digit number with the numeric buttons.
e.g.:
“5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
≥[RAM] Press [A] to switch to the Title View screen, when the
Album View screen is displayed.
≥If you enter a number larger than the total number of titles, the
last title is selected.
≥“To show other pages” (l 41)
∫ To exit the Title View screen
Press [RETURN].
For your reference
≥Direct Navigator screen icons
: Title protected
: Copy-protected so it was not recorded
t: Unable to play
¥: Currently recording
: Title with “One time only recording” restriction (l 76, CPRM)
[RAM]
The play speed can be increased without distorting the audio.
During Play
Press and hold [1, PLAY].
∫ To return to normal speed
Press [1, PLAY].
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
During Play
Press [6,
SLOW/SEARCH] or
[5, SLOW/SEARCH].
≥There are 5 search speeds. Each press
increases the search speed. ([+R] [+RW] Up to 3 speeds)
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart playback.
For your reference
≥Sound is output only in the first level of fast forward. In the case of
DVD-Audio (except motion picture parts), CD and MP3, it is output
in all levels.
≥Depending on the disc, search may not be possible.
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Skipping
Skipping the specified time — Time Slip
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
During play or while paused
Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP].
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
Slow-motion play
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only) [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused
Press [6, SLOW/SEARCH]
≥When slow motion play is continued for about 5 minutes it pauses
automatically (excluding [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD]).
≥There are 5 play speeds. Each press increases the play speed.
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart playback.
≥[VCD] Forward direction ([5, SLOW/SEARCH]) only.
Frame-by-frame viewing
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only) [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused
Press [2;] ([2]) or [;1] ([1]).
≥Each press shows the next or previous frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart playback.
≥[VCD] Forward direction ([;1], [1]) only.
Direct play
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
You can play from the title, chapter or track you select.
During Play
Press the numeric buttons to select an item.
“5”:
“15”:
[0] )[5]
[1] )[5]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[1]
During play
Press [TIME SLIP].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the time and press
[ENTER].
Play skip to the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4] the time increases [3] or decreases
[4] by 1 minute intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute intervals.)
Changing audio during play
or
[5, SLOW/SEARCH].
e.g.:
Playing discs
M6VP&PC.book 33 ページ
[CD] (MP3, JPEG and TIFF disc only)
“5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
Press [AUDIO] to select the audio type.
≥You can select audio types depend on the recording medium.
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Stereo # Mono L # Mono R
^--------------------------------------}
e.g.: [RAM]
“Stereo” is
selected.
DVD-RAM
Play
Stereo
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [When playing an SAP broadcast recorded on DVDRAM, DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)]
MAIN Audio () SAP Audio
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
This allows you to change items like the audio channel number and
the sound track language. (l 39)
Soundtrack
1 ENG
Î Digital 3/2.1ch
e.g.: English is the selected language. [DVD-V]
[VHS]
Stereo > Mono L > Mono R > No display (Normal audio track)
^------------------------------------------------------------}
Note
≥If you cannot change the audio type when you have used only an
optical digital cable for connection, set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM”
(l 64). Alternatively, you may connect to an amplifier with an
Audio/Video cable and change the input on the amplifier to suit the
connection.
[DVD-A]
A group number can be specified while the screen saver (l 32) is
displayed.
e.g.:
“5”: [5]
≥This works only when stopped (screen saver is displayed) with
some discs.
≥Playing bonus groups
Some discs contain bonus groups. If a password screen appears
after selecting a group, enter the password with the numeric
buttons and press [ENTER]. For the password, refer to the disc’s
jacket, etc.
CM Skip
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
You can skip approximately 1 minute with one press.
During play
Press [CM SKIP].
Create chapters
[RAM]
During play
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
≥Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to skip to the start of a chapter.
≥You cannot activate this function when you are carrying out
transfer (copy).
33
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 34 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Using menus to play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
∫ To show other groups
DVD/VHS
Press [:] (Prev.) or [9] (Next) to show other pages.
≥After listing all the tracks in one group, the list for the next group
appears.
POWER
POWER
VOLUME
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
∫ To exit the file list
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numeric
buttons
RESET
:, 9
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
FF
REW
SKIP/INDEX
∫
PAUSE
PLAY
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
ENTER
SUB MENU
B
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] or [RETURN].
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
2
Preparation
≥Turn on the TV and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to the unit.
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
Playing discs which contain both MP3
and still pictures
[CD]
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc
containing MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF).
Press [ENTER].
Playback mode is set to MP3.
To display pictures,
please select Pictures Menu from FUNCTIONS.
∫ To play MP3
Refer to “Playing MP3”. (l below)
∫ To play still pictures
ENTER
Refer to “To show Pictures Menu”. (l 35)
Regarding MP3
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
≥Maximum number of files (tracks) and folders (groups)
recognizable: 999 files° (tracks) and 99 (including the root
folder) folders (groups)
° Total number for all the MP3, JPEG and other types of files
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of
the disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you
numbered them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording, some items may not be playable.
≥File format: MP3
Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
≥Bit rates: 32 kbps to 320 kbps
≥Sampling frequency: 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/
44.1 kHz/48 kHz
≥This unit is not compatible with ID3 tags.
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3
file, play may not be possible.
≥You can play MP3 on this unit by making folders as shown below.
However depending on how you create the disc (writing
software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
≥English alphabetical characters and Arabic numerals are
displayed correctly. Other characters may not be displayed
correctly.
≥When the highest level folders are “DCIM” folders, they are
displayed first on the tree.
Structure of MP3 folders
Prefix with 3-digit numbers
in the order you want to play
them.
Tree
001
001 Group
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
002 Group
Order of play
Playing MP3
003 Group
[CD]
The unit plays MP3 files recorded on CD-R/RW designed for audio
recording that are finalized (l 76) on a computer. Files are treated
as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
[1]
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
During stop or play
∫ Using the tree screen to find a group
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[1]
≥The file list appears.
Menu
G
T
Total
1
1
No.
Group
1 : MP3_MUSIC
Total
Track
1
001 Both Ends Freezing
Tree
1/ 24
3
No.
0 – 9
Next
Page 001/016
3
ENTER
≥Play starts on the selected track.
≥“
” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also directly select the track with the numeric buttons.
e.g.:
“6”: [0] )[0] )[6]
“10”: [0] )[1] )[0]
∫ Using the tree screen to find a group (l right)
RQTV0141
1
1
1/ 24
Prev.
ENTER
Tree
Menu
G
T
Total
No.
0 – 9
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the track and press
[ENTER].
34
While the file list is displayed (l left)
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
Selected Group No. and Name
G:
The Group Number
T:
Track Number in the Group
Total:
Selected Track Number/
Total Track Number
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
MP3_MUSIC
001 My favorite
001 Brazillian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 PC Files
005 Japanese pops
006 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard Number
001 Piano solo
002 Vocal
G 1/ 15
Selected Group Number/Total
Group Number
≥If the group has no track, “– –”
is displayed as group number.
≥A folder which has no MP3 files is indicated in black. You
cannot select groups with no MP3 files.
≥Press [2, 1] to jump layers in the tree screen.
[2] Press [3, 4] to select a group and press
[ENTER].
≥The file list for the selected group appears.
∫ To return to the file list
Press [RETURN].
[1] Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Menu” with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
[3] Select “Pictures” with
[3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
∫ To show other pages
Press [:] (Previous) or [9]
(Next) to show other pages.
≥You can also press [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER] to show other pages.
∫ To exit the Pictures Menu
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] or
[RETURN].
[RAM]
35
RQTV0141
Using menus to play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
[CD]
[1]
While the Picture View screen
is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select “Folder” and
press [ENTER].
ASelected folder no./Total folder
no.
BYou cannot select folders that
contain no compatible files.
[RAM] [SD]
≥Once erased, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[1]
While playing
Press [DELETE].
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
∫ Start Slideshow/Slideshow settings
You can display still pictures one by one with constant interval.
[RAM] [SD]
[1] While the Album View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [SUB MENU].
≥You can start slideshow quickly by pressing [1, PLAY].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and
press [ENTER].
[CD]
[1]
While the Picture View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press
[SUB MENU].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and
press [ENTER].
∫ To change the display timing
[1] Select “Slideshow settings” with [3, 4] in step 2 above and
press [ENTER].
[2] Press [2, 1] to select the desired timing (0 to 30 seconds) and
press [ENTER].
∫ To repeat play
[1] Select “Slideshow settings” with [3, 4] in step 2 of “Start
Slideshow/Slideshow settings” and press [ENTER].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play” .
[3] Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [ENTER].
∫ To rotate a still picture
[RAM] [SD] [CD]
[1]
While playing
Press [SUB MENU].
[2] Select “Rotate Right” or “Rotate
Left” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
∫ To return the rotated picture to its original position
Press [3, 4] to select the opposite rotation in step 2 and press [ENTER].
For your reference
≥Rotation information will not be stored;
- [CD] When Still pictures
- When disc is protected
- When played on other equipment
- When copying pictures
∫ To zoom in/out
[RAM] [SD] [CD]
[1]
While playing
Press [SUB MENU].
[2] Select “Zoom in” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
∫ To return the picture to its original size
Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press [ENTER].
36
For your reference
≥When zooming in, the still picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures
smaller than 640k480 pixels.
RQTV0141
While playing
Press [STATUS]
twice.
≥Press [STATUS]
again, the properties
disappear.
M6VP&PC.book 37 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.
[2] Select VHS side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[3] Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. the AV
input) on the TV.
[4] Insert a recorded video cassette. (l 24)
[5] Press [1, PLAY].
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
Í
∫
6JET REW
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
STOP
PAUSE
≥Play starts automatically if you insert a video cassette with the
tab removed.
CH
∫ To pause play
DELETE
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart play.)
6, 5
∫ To stop play
Press [∫, STOP].
FF
1
;
PLAY
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
SCHEDULE
TIONS
FU N C
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
DRIVE
SELECT
ENTER
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
F Rec
STATUS
Fast-forward/Rewind
While stopped
Press [6] (backward)/[5]
Notes
≥When the unit is on standby, an inserted video cassette can be
played back by pressing [1, PLAY].
≥When the tape reaches its end, the unit automatically rewinds it to
the beginning. This function does not work during scheduled
recording, fast-forwarding and specified stop recording.
≥Jet Search, cue, review or slow playback will be automatically
canceled after 10 minutes, and pause after 5 minutes.
≥When viewing a still picture or during slow playback, the picture
that appears in VP mode may be distorted.
≥When playing back a tape which was recorded on another VCR, it
may be necessary to adjust the tracking (l 38). In some cases the
picture quality may still be inferior. This is due to format
constraints.
Jet Rewind
To perform a Higher Speed Rewind
(forward).
Cue/Review
During play
Tap or keep pressing [6] (backward)/[5]
(forward).
≥If you keep pressing these buttons, normal playback restarts by
releasing them.
≥Tap [1, PLAY] to restart normal playback.
Jet Search
During play
Tap [6] (backward)/[5]
(forward) twice. You can
increase Cue/Review search speed.
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart normal playback.
≥You can select search speed to view the recorded picture. (l 65)
≥The picture recorded in EP or VP mode may be distorted if it is
played at approx. 35 times speed. A vertical scroll may occur. It is
not a malfunction but if it happens, change to approx. 27 times
speed.
≥The picture may not be in color or may be distorted depending on
the TV.
Slow
During play
Press and hold [;, PAUSE] for about 2 seconds or
more.
Press [6JET REW].
≥Depending on the tape or an operating condition, the rewind speed
may change somewhat.
≥The tape counter is reset to “0:00.00” when the tape is rewound to
the beginning.
≥Depending on the tape, this function may not work.
Using menus to play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)/Playing a video cassette
Playing a video cassette
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB)
It is also possible to play back tapes recorded in the S-VHS system.
≥Some picture noise may occur depending on the type of tape used.
≥It is not possible to fully obtain the high resolution that S-VHS is
capable of.
≥It is not possible to record in the S-VHS system with the unit.
Repeat Playback
During play or while stopped
Keep pressing [1, PLAY]
for about 5 or more
seconds.
≥At the end of the program, the tape rewinds to the beginning of the
program and plays it again (it only works if there is at least
5 seconds blank space at the end of the program). This repeats
until you cancel it.
∫ To restart normal playback
Press [1, PLAY].
∫ To stop play
Press [∫, STOP].
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart normal playback.
37
RQTV0141
Playing a video cassette
Adjusting the playback picture
∫ Manual tracking
The unit usually makes tracking adjustments, but you may need to
do it manually if noise appears on a tape recorded on other
equipment.
During play
Various on-screen display indications
On-screen display below appears during play on VHS.
To see these displays, set the “Status Messages” item in the “Setup”
to “Automatic”. (l 65)
Press [STATUS].
The time and operation details appear on the screen.
1
2
4
Press [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] or
[TRACKING/V-LOCK, s].
VHS
Mono L
0:00.22
SP 1
Repeat until the noise disappears.
5
6
∫ Vertical locking adjustment
Adjust the vertical synchronization to stop the picture from jiggling
while paused.
While paused
Press [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] or
[TRACKING/V-LOCK, s].
1
Current drive
Repeat until the jiggling stops.
2
Audio indicators
The Left (Mono L) and Right (Mono R) indicators show
which sound mode is selected as follows:
Stereo:
Stereo indicator appears.
Mono L:
The Mono L indicator appears.
Mono R:
The Mono R indicator appears.
Normal:
Neither the L nor R indicator appears.
3
Operation status display
4
Shows the tape counter and remaining tape time
Pressing [STATUS] once makes the on-screen display
appear. After that, press the button repeatedly to change
the display as follows:
No display > Tape counter > Remaining tape time
^-----------------------------------------------------------------}
≥Press [¢, CANCEL] to reset the tape counter (elapsed
time) to “0:00.00”. The tape counter is automatically reset
to “0:00.00” when inserting a video cassette.
≥The remaining time is approximate. It will be incorrect if
you set the wrong tape time in “Select Tape Length” in the
“Setup” and if the tape is of poor quality. (l 65)
5
Cassette-in indicator
Shows whether you have inserted a video cassette.
6
Recording mode indicator (l 26)
∫ To return to auto tracking
Press both [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] and [TRACKING/V-LOCK, s]
simultaneously.
∫ To remove the noise from a paused picture
Start slow play, then adjust the tracking.
Notes
≥This function may not work with some TV models and tapes.
≥You can also adjust the tracking and vertical synchronization with
[CH, W, X] on the main unit.
VHS Index Search System (VISS)
The unit automatically records special index signals on the tape
every time a recording is started. The index search function makes
use of these index signals to let you find the beginning of a desired
program quickly and easily.
∫ Index signals are recorded in the following cases.
≥When a recording is started by pressing [¥, REC].
≥When scheduled recording is started.
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel on the TV.
≥Select VHS side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
≥Insert a recorded video cassette.
While stopped or during normal play
Press [: ] or [ 9].
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
∫ To cancel the index search
Press [∫, STOP].
Notes
≥You can search up to 20 index signals can be searched for in both
directions.
≥When you press either one of the buttons too much, you can
control the number of skips by pressing the opposite button.
≥The figure on the display decreases by 1 each time an index signal
is located.
≥This feature may not work correctly if the index signals are too
close together. Make recordings of at least 5 minutes.
38
RQTV0141
Note
≥The on-screen display may be distorted depending on the
playback tape or the input signal.
M6VP&PC.book 39 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Using on-screen menus
1 Disc menu-Setting disc content
DVD/VHS
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD]
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
VOLUME
Soundtrack
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
:, 9
ADD/DLT
CH
TRACKING/
V-LOCK, r, s
STOP
REW
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (See [A] Sound
track/Subtitle language)
FF
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(Only disc that contain subtitle on/off information)
PLAY
CM SKIP
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
≥If the subtitles overlap the closed captions recorded on discs,
turn the subtitles off.
ENTER
Audio channel [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
DISPLAY
µ
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
3, 4, 1
RETURN
“Changing audio during play” (l 33)
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
Angle [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Change the number to select an angle.
F Rec
STATUS
Still-P (Still picture) [DVD-A]
Selects the play method for still pictures.
Slide Show: Plays according to the default order on the disc.
Page:
Select the still picture number and play.
RANDOM: Plays in random order.
Return:
Returns to the default still picture on the disc.
∫ Common procedures
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
PBC (Playback control) [VCD] (l 76)
Preparation
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1] Press [DISPLAY].
Disc
Play
Video
Audio
Other
Soundtrack
1
Î Digital 2/0ch
Subtitle
Off
Stereo
Audio channel
Menu
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Select the audio and language. (See [B] Audio attributes)
Subtitle
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
∫
CH
Item
Setting
[2] Select a menu with [3, 4] and press [1].
[3] Select an item with [3, 4] and press [1].
[4] Select a setting with [3, 4].
≥Different operations are required depending on settings.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
∫ To exit the screen
Press [DISPLAY].
For your reference
≥The screens depend on the disc contents.
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped, etc.) and
the type of software you are playing, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
[A] Sound track/Subtitle language
ENG: English
DAN: Danish
THA: Thai
FRA: French
POR: Portuguese
POL: Polish
DEU: German
RUS: Russian
CES: Czech
ITA: Italian
JPN: Japanese
SLK: Slovak
ESP: Spanish
CHI: Chinese
HUN: Hungarian
Finnish
NLD: Dutch
KOR: Korean
FIN:
¢:
Others
SVE: Swedish
MAL: Malay
NOR: Norwegian VIE: Vietnamese
Playing a video cassette/Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and Status messages
Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and Status messages
[B] Audio attributes
LPCM/PPCM/Î Digital/DTS/MPEG: Signal type
k (kHz):
Sampling frequency
b (bit):
Number of bits
ch (channel):
Number of channels
For your reference
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
make a change when there is no recording.
≥Some discs allow changes to sound tracks, subtitles, and angles
only by using the disc’s setup menus.
1 Play menu-Change play sequence
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD] [CD]
Repeat play
This function works only when the elapsed play time is
displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items
that can be selected will differ.
≥All
≥Chapter
[VCD] [CD] (excluding MP3 discs)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Group
[DVD-A] [CD] (MP3 discs only)
≥Playlists [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Title
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Track
[DVD-A] [VCD] [CD]
Select “Off” to cancel.
39
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 40 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and Status messages
1 Video menu-Change picture quality
FUNCTIONS window
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD]
By using the FUNCTIONS window you can access the main
functions quickly and easily.
Picture
[1]
To select the picture mode during play
Normal: Default setting
Soft:
Soft picture with fewer video artifacts
Fine:
Details are sharper
Cinema: Mellows movies, enhances detail in dark scenes.
DNR
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
On()Off
°Progressive (l 76)
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
≥Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
≥When progressive output is on, closed captions cannot be
displayed.
On()Off
°Transfer (When “Progressive” is set to “On”)
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of material being played (l 76, “Film and Video”).
Auto1 (normal):
Detects 24 frame-per-second film content and
appropriately converts it.
Auto2: Compatible with 30 frame-per-second film content in
addition to 24 frame-per-second film content.
Video: Select when the video content is distorted by using
Auto1 and Auto2.
While stopped
FUNCTIONS
≥Functions displayed depend
on the type of disc.
° Only when you have selected “480p” in “TV Type” (l 20).
1 Audio menu-Change sound effect
Program
Copy
[2] Select an item with
[3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
≥If you select “Other
Functions”, press [3, 4] to select an item and press [ENTER].
∫ To exit the FUNCTIONS window
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Status messages
Status messages appear on the TV when operating the unit, to show
you what operation was performed and what condition the unit is in.
Press [STATUS] to change the information
displayed.
The display changes each time you press the button.
For example,
Line-in NR (Only when IN1, IN2 or DV is selected)
Reduces video tape noise during transfer (copy).
Depending on the software, jittering may occur.
Automatic:
Noise reduction only works on picture input from a
video tape.
On:
Noise reduction works for any video input.
Off:
Noise reduction is off. Select when you want to record
input as is.
No Disc
No Disc
Press [FUNCTIONS].
(1)
DVD-RAM
Rec.
Play
Stereo
(2)
VHS Rec.
(4)
(5)
(3)
(6)
π Remain
5/22 10:15 PM
1:34 SP
π T1
π T2
00:05.14 XP
00:00.10 SP
(8)
(7)
DVD-RAM
Rec.
Play
Stereo
VHS Rec.
No display
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
V. Surround Sound
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
(Only for Dolby Digital with 2.0 or more channels)
Enjoy a surround-sound effect if you are using 2 front speakers
(L/R) only.
Natural()Emphasis()Off
^----------------------------------------J
Notes
≥Turn V. Surround Sound off if it causes distortion.
≥V. Surround Sound does not work for SAP recordings.
Dialog Enhancer
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a center
channel)
The volume of the center channel is raised to make dialog easier
to hear.
On()Off
1 Other menu-Change the display position
Position
To change the display position
1 (Standard) –5:
The higher the setting the lower the screen moves.
40
RQTV0141
∫ Display examples
(1) Current medium
(2) Current recording or play status, input channel
≥Shows the current state of the unit and the input channel.
(3) Audio type (l 27, 33)
(4) Other drive mode
(5) The current date and time
(6) Available recording time and recording mode
(e.g.: “1:34 SP” indicates 1 hour and 34 minutes in SP mode)
≥Disc remaining time may slightly differ between different
models.
(7) Elapsed play time
(8) Recording time
≥Shows recording time, recording mode and a rough guide to
how much space has been used for recording on the disc.
M6VP&PC.book 41 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Editing titles/Chapters and playing
chapters
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
Note
≥Once deleted, divided or shortened, the title cannot be restored to
its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
:, 9
ADD/DLT
CH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
CM SKIP
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
;
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
FUNCTIONS
Delete Title
Properties
Edit Title
[3] Press [SUB MENU].
[4] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item
and press [ENTER].
View Chapters
Album View
≥After this operation, follow the desired operation.
∫ To stop in the middle
Press [RETURN].
RETURN
CREATE
e.g.; [RAM]
≥“To show other pages” (l below)
FF
PLAY
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
desired title.
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l 60, cartridge l 60). [RAM]
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
CH
RESET
STOP
Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and Status messages/Editing titles/chapters
Editing titles/chapters
RETURN
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
For your reference
≥When the title is protected (l 42), some items are not accessible.
Release the protection to access the inaccessible items. [RAM]
STATUS
Title operations
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] and the list of titles recorded (Title
View) is shown. You can play and edit a desired title.
For your reference
≥You cannot edit during recording or transferring (copying), etc.
≥You can create a Top Menu using “Create DVD Top Menu” (l 62).
Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again. [+RW]
≥Management information is recorded in unused sections when you
edit discs. The available space these discs decreases each time
you edit their contents. [+R] [+R]DL]
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
- Title:
99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
- Chapter: Approximately 1000
([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approximately 254)
(Depends on the state of recording.)
Title/Chapter
Programs are recorded as a single title consisting of one chapter.
Title
Chapter
Start
End
You can divide a title into multiple chapters. [RAM]
(l 33, “Create chapters”, l 43 “Create Chapter”)
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
≥You can change the order of chapters and create a playlist
(l 44). [RAM]
≥Titles are divided into chapters about 5 minutes after finalizing
(l 61). [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] (8 minutes [+R] [+R]DL])
∫ Delete Title
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(Multiple editing is possible. l below)
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Editing titles/Chapters and playing
chapters”.
e.g.; [RAM]
Once title is deleted using this
procedure, it cannot be retrieved.
Check the title carefully before
erasing to ensure it isn’t the one you
want to keep.
Delete Title
Date
Channel
10/23/2007 Mon
12
Time remaining
after deletion
Start
12:00 AM
0 : 58(SP)
Corresponding playlist's chapters will be deleted.
Delete
Cancel
[4] Select “Delete Title”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Select “Delete” with [2] and press [ENTER].
ENTER
For your reference
≥The disc’s available recording time may not increase after erasing
short titles.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL
does not increase when you delete titles.
≥The available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+RW increases when the last recorded title is deleted. (The
recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.)
∫ Properties
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Editing titles/Chapters and playing
chapters”.
Title information (e.g., date and
time) is shown.
[4] Select “Properties”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Properties
Football
Number
Date
Channel
01
Start
1/ 1/2007 Mon Rec. Length
12
1:02 PM
1:00(SP)
ENTER
Various operations
∫ To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to show other pages.
∫ Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
∫ Album View
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Editing titles/Chapters and playing
chapters”.
[4] Select “Album View” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥Album View screen is displayed.
[“Playing still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)” l 35]
41
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 42 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Editing titles/chapters
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
DVD/VHS
Set Protection
POWER
Set title protection.
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
VOLUME
Yes
10 10/23 Mon
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
REW
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
CH
DVD-RAM
ADD/DLT
CH
Yes
Cancel Protection:
The padlock mark
disappears.
07
No
10 10/23 Mon
DELETE
ENTER
--
For your reference
Titles will be erased even if they are protected if you format the disc
with DVD Management (l 60).
FF
PLAY
1
CM SKIP
1 Shorten Title
ENTER
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Cancel title protection.
SCHEDULE
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
You can remove unnecessary parts of the title such as commercials.
SUB MENU
RETURN
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
--
Cancel Protection
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
STOP
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
Set up Protection:
The padlock mark
appears.
07
No
ENTER
TRACKING/V-LOCK
RESET
:, 9
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
DVD-RAM
POWER
CREATE
RETURN
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
∫ Edit Title
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Shorten Title
Video
DVD-RAM
08
Play
Picture
Start
End
Next
Exit
0:43.21
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
ENTER
(l 43, “For quicker editing”)
You can perform various kinds of title editing.
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l 60, cartridge l 60). [RAM]
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] and use [3, 4, 2,
1] to select a desired title.
≥“To show other pages” l 41
≥“Multiple editing” l 41
[2] Press [SUB MENU].
[4] Select “Shorten Title”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Press [ENTER] at the
start point and end
point of the section
you want to erase.
[6] Select “Exit” with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Delete” with
[2] and press
[ENTER].
Shorten Title
Date
Channel
5/ 22/2006 Mon
12
Time remaining
after deletion
Start
12:00 AM
1 : 57(SP)
Corresponding playlist's chapters will be deleted.
Delete
Cancel
∫ To erase another part of the same title
e.g.; [RAM]
[3] Select “Edit Title” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[4] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item
and press [ENTER].
Cancel Protection
≥The editing screen for the selected item
appears.
Divide Title
Title Name
Set Protection
Shorten Title
Change Thumbnail
After setting the point in “Start” and “End”, select “Next” in step 5 and
perform step 7, then repeat steps 5 to 7.
For your reference
≥You may not be able to specify start and end points within
3 seconds of each other.
≥The disc’s available recording time may not increase after erasing
short parts of titles.
1 Change Thumbnail
Press [RETURN].
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
∫ To exit the screen
You can change the image to be shown as a thumbnail picture in the
Title View.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
1 Title Name
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
[4] Select “Title Name” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥Refer to “Entering text”. (l 58)
1 Set Protection/Cancel Protection
[RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] (“Multiple editing” l 41)
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
You can prevent accidental erasure of titles by setting and canceling
the write-protection.
[4] Select “Set Protection” or “Cancel Protection”
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
42
RQTV0141
[4] Select “Change
Thumbnail” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[5] Press [1, PLAY] to
play.
[6] Press [ENTER] at the
point you want to
display.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
Video
DVD-RAM
;
08
Picture
Change
Exit
0:00.00
Change
0:00.00
Start play and select
the thumbnail position.
ENTER
(l 43, “For quicker editing”)
≥To change to another point in the same title:
- Select “Change” with [3, 4] and press [1, PLAY] and then
repeat step 6.
[7] Select “Exit” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
≥The thumbnail picture will be changed at this point.
1 Divide Title
1 Delete Chapter
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
[RAM] (“Multiple editing” l 41)
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.
You can divide a selected title into two. You must be careful when
dividing a title because it cannot be recovered after the procedure.
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[4] Select “Divide Title”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Press [ENTER] at the
point you want to
divide the title.
[6] Select “Delete Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[7] Select “Delete” with [2] and press [ENTER].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title
(l lower right, “For quicker
editing”)
≥To change the point to
divide:
- Select “Divide” with [3, 4]
and press [1, PLAY], and
then repeat steps 5 to 7.
Video
DVD-RAM
;
08
Picture
Preview
Divide
Exit
0:00.05
Divide
0:00.05
ENTER
Date
Channel
Divide Title
5/ 22/2006 Mon
12
Start
12:00 AM
1 Create Chapter
Once divided, this title
cannot be recombined.
Divide
Cancel
[6] Select “Exit” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Divide” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥The title is divided at that point.
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.
[6] Select “Create Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[7] Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide.
(l below, “For quicker editing”)
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
∫ To check the division point
By selecting “Preview” in step 5 and pressing [ENTER], play will
begin from 10 seconds prior to the division point to 10 seconds after
the division point.
For your reference
≥The divided titles retain the name of the original title. They also
retain the CPRM property (l 76) of the original.
≥Video and audio just before and after the division point will be
momentarily cut out.
≥It is not possible to carry out “Divide” in the following cases:
- When the resulting part(s) are extremely short.
- When the total number of titles is more than 99.
Chapter operations
∫ View Chapters
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] and use [3, 4, 2,
1] to select a desired title.
≥“To show other pages” l 41
[2] Press [SUB MENU].
[3] Select “View Chapters” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[4] Select a desired chapter with
[3, 4, 2, 1].
≥To start play l Press [ENTER].
≥To edit l Follow the steps below.
[8] Select “Exit” with [4] and press [ENTER].
Note
≥A short portion of the recording just after the creation point may be
lost.
For your reference
≥The divided titles retain the name of the original title. They also
retain the CPRM property (l 76) of the original.
≥It is not possible to carry out “Create” when the resulting part(s) are
extremely short.
1 Combine Chapters
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.
e.g.: [RAM]
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
[6] Select “Combine Chapters” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Combine” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥The selected chapter and next chapter are combined.
View Titles
[5] Press [SUB MENU].
[6] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
1 View Titles
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.
[6] Select “View Titles” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
You go back to Title View.
For quicker editing
≥
43
RQTV0141
Creating, editing and playing playlist
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
DVD/VHS
POWER
≥The Playlist View appears.
POWER
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numeric
buttons
RESET
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
SKIP/INDEX
STOP
∫
CH
PAUSE
FF
PLAY
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
[4] Select “Create” with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Use [2, 1] to select the source title and press
[4].
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
FUNCTIONS
≥When you want to select all chapters in the title, use [2, 1] to
select the source title and press [ENTER], then skip to step 7.
≥Repeat steps 5 to 7 to add other titles or chapters.
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
[6] Use [2, 1] to select the chapter you want to add
to a playlist and press [ENTER].
≥Press [3] to cancel.
[RAM]
You can create a playlist by gathering your favorite chapters (l 41)
from your recordings. You can also play and edit the created playlist.
≥You can also create a new chapter in the source title.
Press [SUB MENU] to select “Create Chapter” and press
[ENTER] (l 43, “Create Chapter”).
Playlist
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Playlist
[7] Use [2, 1] to select the position to insert the
chapter and press [ENTER].
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
≥The chapter is registered in the playlist.
≥Repeat steps 6 to 7 to add other chapters.
≥To select other source titles, press [3] several times to return
to step 5.
Chapter
≥Editing playlists doesn’t modify titles.
≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
- Playlists: 99
- Chapters in play lists:
Approximately 1000 (Depends on the state of recording.)
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording.
Creating playlists
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
44
RQTV0141
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
Preparation
≥Create playlists.
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1]
[RAM]
Preparation
≥Release protection. (disc l 60, cartridge l 60)
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
[1]
[8] Press [RETURN].
FUNCTIONS
DVD-RAM
Playback
Program
Delete
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist and press
[ENTER].
≥Chapters are not displayed if you have not yet created a
playlist with the disc.
≥You can also select a playlist from the Playlist View by entering
a 2-digit number with the numeric buttons.
e.g.:
“5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
≥If you enter a number larger than the total number of playlists,
“Create” is selected.
≥“To show other pages” l 41
∫ Properties
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Editing playlists/chapters”.
[6] Select “Properties” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Playlist information (e.g., date and length) is shown.
Properties
Dinosaur
Number
Chapters:
03
004
∫ To stop playlist play
Press [∫, STOP]. (The Playlist View screen appears.)
Date:
Length:
5/23/2006 Tue
0:05.51
ENTER
∫ Edit
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
[RAM]
∫ To exit the screen
You can perform various kinds of playlist editing.
Press [RETURN].
[1]
∫ To delete a playlist during play
[1] Press [DELETE].
≥A confirmation message will be displayed.
[2] Use [2] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
For your reference
≥You can use fast-forward, fast-rewind, pause, and slow-motion
while playing chapters just as you can during normal play.
Creating, editing and playing playlist
M6VP&PC.book 45 ページ
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist.
≥“To show other pages” l 41
[5] Press [SUB MENU],
then select “Edit”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select a
desired item and
press [ENTER].
Editing playlists/chapters
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Properties only)
Preparation
≥Create playlists. (l 44)
≥Release protection (disc l 60, cartridge l 60). [RAM]
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥Chapters are not displayed if you have not yet created a
playlist on the disc.
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist.
≥“To show other pages” l 41
e.g.: [RAM]
Delete Playlist
[5] Press [SUB MENU].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item
and press [ENTER].
Properties
Edit
View Chapters
e.g.: [RAM]
Delete Playlist
Create
Properties
Copy
Edit
Playlist Name
Change Thumbnail
View Chapters
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
1 Create
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.
[6] Select “Create” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
Refer to “Creating playlists”, steps 5–8. (l 44)
“
1 Copy
(“Multiple editing” l 41)
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.
∫ To return to the previous screen
[6] Select “Copy” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Copy” with [2] and press [ENTER].
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Copy
Press [RETURN].
Copy this playlist?
Playlist operations
Copy
ENTER
∫ Delete Playlist
1 Playlist Name
[RAM] (“Multiple editing” l 41)
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Editing playlists/chapters”.
[6] Select “Delete Playlist”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[7] Select “Delete” with
[2] and press
[ENTER].
Cancel
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.
Delete Playlist
[6] Select “Playlist Name” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Delete playlist ?
Delete
Cancel
Refer to “Entering text”. (l 58)
ENTER
≥The playlist is deleted.
≥Once a playlist has been deleted, it cannot be restored. Check
carefully before proceeding.
≥Even if you delete the playlist, the original title is not deleted.
45
RQTV0141
Creating, editing and playing playlist
1 Change Thumbnail
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.
You can change the image to be shown as a thumbnail picture in the
Playlist View.
[6] Select “Change
Thumbnail” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[7] Press [1, PLAY] to play.
[8] Press [ENTER] at the
point you want to display.
PLAYLISTS
Change Thumbnail
DVD-RAM
Change
≥The chapter is moved and
inserted before the
highlighted chapter.
Exit
0:00.00
Change
0:00.00
(l 43, “For quicker editing”)
≥To change to another point in the same title:
- Select “Change” with [3, 4] and press [1, PLAY], and then
repeat step 8.
[9] Select “Exit” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
≥The displayed scene is changed at this point.
Chapter operations
∫ View Chapters
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
You can play/edit the chapters in a playlist.
[1]
[9] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select the position to
insert the chapter and
press [ENTER].
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist.
≥“To show other pages” l 41
[5] Press [SUB MENU], and select “View Chapters”
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a desired chapter.
≥You can also select a chapter from the chapter view by
entering a 3-digit number with the numeric buttons.
e.g.:
“5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
≥If you enter a number larger than the total
number of chapters, the last chapter is
selected.
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify
the source titles and source chapters.
≥“To show other pages” l 41
[7] Press [SUB MENU].
[8] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item
and press [ENTER].
∫ To play a chapter
Press [ENTER] after step 6.
∫ To stop chapter play
Press [∫, STOP]. (The Chapter View screen appears.)
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “Create
Chapter” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[9] Press [ENTER] at the
point you want to
divide. (l 43, “For quicker
editing”)
≥Repeat this step to divide at
other points.
[10] Select “Exit” with [4] and press [ENTER].
Note
≥A short portion of the recording just after the creation point may be
lost.
For your reference
≥The divided titles retain the name of the original title. They also
retain the CPRM property (l 76) of the original.
≥It is not possible to carry out “Create” when the resulting part(s) are
extremely short.
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “Combine Chapters” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[9] Select “Combine” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥The selected chapter and next chapter are combined.
[RAM] (“Multiple editing” l 41)
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[8] Select “Delete Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[9] Select “Delete” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥Even if you delete the chapter, the original title is not deleted.
1 Add Chapter
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “Add Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥Refer to “Creating playlists”, steps 5–8. (l 44)
1 Move Chapter
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
46
[8] Select “Move Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
RQTV0141
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “View Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
You go back to Playlist View.
M6VP&PC.book 47 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
∫ To return to the previous screen
DVD/VHS
Press [RETURN].
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
∫ To exit the screen
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
VOLUME
Various operations
∫ To show other pages
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numeric
buttons
RESET
:, 9
SKIP/INDEX
∫
STOP
CH
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
∫ Multiple editing
REW
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
FF
CM SKIP
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
B
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
1
;
PLAY
SCHEDULE
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to show other
pages.
ADD/DLT
CH
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
[RAM] [SD]
≥You can edit pictures or albums.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(l 8).
≥Still pictures recorded on CD-R or CD-RW cannot be edited.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive (DVD or SD).
≥Release protection (disc l 60, cartridge l 60, card l 60).
Album and picture operations
∫ Add Picture/Create Album
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Editing still pictures”.
[5] Select “Add Picture” or “Create Album” with
[3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[6] Press [2] to select “Start” or “Yes” and press
[ENTER].
[7] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album which
contains picture you want to add and press
[ENTER].
Creating, editing and playing playlist/Editing still pictures
Editing still pictures
≥“To select the still pictures in another folder” l 35
[8] Press [3, 4] to select the item and press
[ENTER].
≥If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:
- Select the still picture you want to add and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy all pictures” is selected:
- All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
[9] Press [2] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
Editing still pictures
≥If you want to continue copying, select “Yes” and go to step 7.
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[2] [RAM]
Press the [B] button to select “Picture”.
[3] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album or still
picture.
≥To edit still picture:
- Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select album which contains picture
you want to edit and press [ENTER].
≥“To show other pages” l right
≥“To select the still pictures in another folder” l 35
[4] Press [SUB MENU].
≥To edit the album
e.g., [SD]
≥“Start Slideshow/Slideshow settings”
l 36
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Add Picture
Create Album
≥This is only displayed when there are
other higher folders that can be viewed.
(To select the still pictures in another
folder l 35)
Edit Album
[10]Only for “Create Album”
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
≥When you select “Yes”, refer to “Entering text”. (l 58)
∫ Delete Picture
[RAM] [SD] (Multiple editing is possible. labove)
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Editing still pictures”.
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[5] Select “Delete Picture” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[6] Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
∫ Set Protection/Cancel Protection
[RAM] [SD] (Multiple editing is possible. labove)
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Editing still pictures”.
If set, this will protect the still picture from accidental erasure.
Select Root folder
[5] Select “Set Protection” or “Cancel Protection”
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[6] Press [2] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥To edit still picture
e.g., [SD]
Delete Picture
≥The lock symbol appears when the still picture is protected.
Set Protection
Cancel Protection
Print Order (DPOF)
Album View
[5] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item and press
[ENTER].
≥After this operation, follow the desired operation.
47
RQTV0141
Editing still pictures
[SD] (Multiple editing is possible. l 47)
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Editing still pictures”.
You can select a whole folder or individual pictures for printing and
specify the number of prints to be made.
[5] Select “Print Order (DPOF)” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[6] Press [2, 1] to select
number of print (0 to 9) and
press [ENTER].
≥The DPOF mark appears.
(This appears on the still pictures inside a folder when
you make the DPOF setting for the folder.)
∫ To cancel the print setting
Set the number of prints to “0”.
For your reference
≥Print settings (DPOF) made using this unit may not be viewable on
other equipment.
≥When this is set by this unit, any settings established by other units
will be released.
≥Settings cannot be made for folders and files not in accordance
with DCFe s 6( )-15no ranchess on tsa.
48
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 49 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Before transferring (copying)
You can select from a variety of methods to transfer (copy) on the unit.
You cannot transfer (copy) titles which have been treated to prevent copying.
Direction
From
Type of transfer (copying) you want
To
Easy transferring (copying) with one button
VHS
DVD-RAM, DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVDRW(DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL or
+RW
≥When you want to transfer (copy) from the selected start
point to the end of the tape
Suitable methods
One Touch Transfer
(l 50)
Transferring (copying) with detailed settings
≥When you want to transfer (copy) from the selected start
point to the end of the tape
≥When you want to transfer (copy) for the limited amount of
time
≥When you want to transfer (copy) to fit in the remaining
capacity of the disc
GUI Transfer (l 51)
Easy transferring (copying) with one button
DVD-RAM, +RW or
DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format)
VHS
≥When you want to transfer (copy) a whole disc
≥When you want to transfer (copy) from the beginning of the
selected title and playlist to the end of the disc°
One Touch Transfer
(l 52)
Editing still pictures/Transferring (Copying)
Transferring (Copying)
Transferring (copying) with detailed settings
≥When you want to transfer (copy) multiple titles or playlists in
combination°
GUI Transfer (l 53)
Easy transferring (copying) with one button
DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R or +R DL
Finalized DVD-R, DVDR DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R,
+R DL or DVD-Video
on sale that are not
copy-protected, etc.
VHS
≥When you want to transfer (copy) a whole disc
≥When you want to transfer (copy) from the beginning of the
selected title to the end of the disc
One Touch Transfer
(l 52)
Transferring (copying) with detailed settings
Cannot transfer
Easy transferring (copying) with one button
Cannot transfer
Transferring (copying) with detailed settings
VHS
≥When you want to transfer (copy) whole of a disc
≥When you want to transfer only for the specified time
DVD-Video Transfer
(l 54)
° Since you cannot create playlists on +RW, you cannot copy those. [+RW]
∫ Caution for transfer (copying) from VHS to DVD
∫ Caution for transfer (copying) from DVD to VHS
≥Copy-protected video tapes cannot be copied. Most video tapes
are copy-protected to prevent illegal copying so they cannot be
copied.
≥When a copy-protected tape is inserted, a message appears on
the display and the recording stops on the spot.
≥If a part of a tape recorded in VP mode is copied to disc, noise
may appear at the beginning of the copied part.
≥Copy-protected discs cannot be copied. Most discs are copyprotected to prevent illegal copying so they cannot be copied.
Only the following operations are allowed while transferring
(copying):
≥Stopping transfer (One Touch or GUI Transfer) by pressing and
holding [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
≥Stopping transfer (One Touch Transfer) by pressing [∫, STOP].
When transfer (copying) is started, the following operations
also start automatically
≥“Status Messages” on Display ) “Off” (l 65) (One Touch or
GUI Transfer)
Only the following operations are allowed while transferring
(copying):
≥Stopping transfer (One Touch or GUI Transfer) by pressing and
holding [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
≥Stopping transfer (One Touch Transfer) by pressing [∫, STOP].
When transfer (copying) is started, the following operations
also start automatically
≥“Status Messages” on Display ) “Off” (l 65) (One Touch or
GUI Transfer)
≥Audio output when playing back DVD ) Stereo (L R) [RAM]
(One Touch or GUI Transfer)
When the playback location of the disc is recorded by the
Resume Function (l 32) and you start transferring (copying), the
transfer (copying) is executed from the top of the title which
contains the starting position of playback to the end of the disc.
∫ Copying still pictures [RAM] [SD]
≥When you want to copy all still pictures on a SD card. (l 55)
≥When you want to copy multiple still pictures in combination. (l 55)
49
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 50 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Transferring (Copying)
Transfer (Copying) from VHS
[1]
DVD/VHS
POWER
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numeric
buttons
e.g.; [RAM]
Press and hold [“ DVD] on
the main unit for about
3 seconds or more (until
“START” on the unit’s
display terminates flashing).
POWER
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
While both DVD and VHS are
stopped
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
Copy
STOP
∫
PAUSE
FF
PLAY
1
or [1, PLAY] on the main
unit to copy the disc with
or without finalizing.
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
F Rec
[1, PLAY]
[
[ , REC]
, STOP]
E
CT
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
And then press [¥, REC]
REC
Do you want to finalize the disc after copying?
"Finalize" the disc to enable it for playback on
compatible DVD players.
Note: titles cannot be added to finalized discs.
Press REC to start copying.The DVD will
automatically be finalized after copying completes.
Press PLAY to start copying without finalizing.
Press STOP to cancel copying.
≥If you press [¥, REC] on the main unit, the disc will
automatically be finalized after copying completes.
≥If you press [1, PLAY] on the main unit, you can start
copying without finalizing.
≥If you press [∫, STOP] on the main unit, you can cancel to
copy.
≥Check if transfer (copying) starts properly.
≥Copying is automatically completed when the tape reaches its
end or the disc becomes full.
≥If you press [¥, REC] on the main unit to finalize;
After finalizing, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment.
However, you can no longer record or edit.
≥In case the copying doesn’t complete due to shortage of
remaining time of disc or etc., the finalizing doesn’t start.
COPYING
SD CARD/DV IN
∫ To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press [∫, STOP] or press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds
or more.
≥However, you cannot stop finalizing after it has started.
COPYING indicator
∫ One Touch Transfer (Copying) (VHS l DVD)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can transfer (copy) programs recorded on a tape onto a disc°
with one stroke of the button.
In One Touch Transfer (Copying), programs are automatically
transferred (copied) onto the disc from the location of playback at
the time when the transfer (copying) of the tape starts.
° Available discs for transfer (copying) from tape are DVD-RAM,
non-finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL, and +RW.
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
DVD
≥Release protection (disc l 60, cartridge l 60). [RAM]
≥Insert a disc and confirm there is sufficient empty space for
recording (l 24, 40).
≥Select the recording mode. (l 26)
≥When SAP broadcast program is played back on VHS, select the
audio to be recorded on disc in “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in
the “Setup” menu. (l 64) [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
VHS
≥Insert the video cassette containing the program to be copied (l 11,
24).
50
RQTV0141
Notes
≥While One Touch Transfer (Copying) is activated, a scheduled
recording cannot be started.
≥When the transfer (copying) is not started or not executed, the
“COPYING” indicator blinks for about 7 seconds. Check if the unit
is properly prepared.
∫ Dividing a title to be copied
In One Touch Transfer (Copying) from VHS to DVD, the title is
divided by index signal detected and then recorded. You can
search desired titles with Direct Navigator’s Title View (l 41) after
transfer (copy) to DVD.
≥Titles recorded within 15 minutes (25 minutes in VP mode) of
each other may not be divided properly.
≥The recording time may become longer than the original title
depending on the number of index signals.
If you want to transfer (copy) without dividing the contents
into titles, follow the methods below.
≥Set “Time Limit” to “On” on the GUI transfer (l 51).
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
[6] Make sure “Start
Copying” is selected
and press [ENTER].
∫ GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer
(Copying)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can transfer (copy) programs recorded on a tape onto a disc°°
from the location° of playback as of the transfer (copying) start of the
tape.
° When you set the recording mode to “FR” and “Time Limit” to
“Off”, you can transfer (copy) the whole tape from the beginning to
the end. (l below)
°° Available discs for transfer (copying) from tape are DVD-RAM,
non-finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL, and +RW.
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
DVD
≥Release protection (disc l 60, cartridge l 60). [RAM]
≥Insert a disc and confirm there is sufficient empty space for
recording on it (l 24, 40).
≥When SAP broadcast program is played back on VHS, select the
audio to be recorded on discs in “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)”
in the “Setup” menu. (l 64) [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
VHS
≥Insert the video cassette containing the program to be copied (l 11,
24).
[1]
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Copy” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
Copy
[3] Set the transfer
Cancel All
(copying) direction.
Source
Copying Direction
SP
VHS-Video
∫ To change the setting
(1)Make sure “Copying Direction” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Source” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “VHS” and press [ENTER].
≥When you set “Source” to “VHS”, “DVD” is automatically
selected on “Destination”.
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
[4] Set the recording mode.
Copy
≥If you are not going to change
the recording mode, press [4],
then skip to step 5.
Copying Direction
∫ To change the setting
Time Limit
Cancel All
VHS
Content Type VHS-Video
DVD
Recording Mode
Mode
SP
SP
VHS-Video
Off
(1)Make sure “Mode” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Recording Mode” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Select recording mode (XP, SP, LP, EP or FR) with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
≥“About FR mode” (l right)
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
[5] Set the time limit.
≥If you are not going to change
the recording time, press [4],
then skip to step 6.
∫ To change the setting
VHS
DVD
Mode
VHS-Video
Time Limit
SP
Press ENTER to start copying.
1:15
Start Copying
ENTER
and press [ENTER].
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
And then press [2, 1] to
select “Copy and
finalize” or “Copy only”
and press [ENTER].
Copying starts.
Note: After copying, the disc should be finalized
for playback on compatible DVD players.
Copy and finalize
Copy only
"Finalize" the disc to enable it for playback on
compatible DVD players.
Note: titles cannot be added to finalized disc.
≥Transfer (copying) is started.
≥Transfer (copying) is
automatically stopped when the tape reaches the end or the
remaining capacity of the disc is filled. (A message appears on
the TV screen and then disappears a few seconds later.)
≥If “Copy and finalize” is selected;
After finalizing, the discs become play-only and you can
also play them on other DVD equipment.
However, you can no longer record or edit.
≥In case the copying doesn’t complete due to shortage of
remaining time of disc or etc., the finalizing doesn’t start.
∫ To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
∫ About FR Mode
Destination
Mode
Cancel All
Copying Direction
Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
≥However, you cannot stop finalizing after it has started.
While both DVD and VHS are stopped
≥Set “Source” to “VHS”.
≥If you are not going to change
the copy direction, press [4],
then skip to step 4.
[7]
≥The confirmation screen
appears.
Select “Yes” with [2]
Copy
Transferring (Copying)
M6VP&PC.book 51 ページ
When “Time Limit” is set to “Off” in Step 5 above:
≥The recording mode is automatically selected by estimating the
remaining capacity of the disc for transfer (copying) of only the
recorded parts in the video cassette (unrecorded parts will not
be recorded).
≥When you press [ENTER] to start transfer (copy), the tape is
automatically fast-forwarded to the end and then fast-rewound
to the beginning before the transfer (copying) is actually started.
It may take time to start transfer (copy). If the remaining
capacity of the disc is insufficient, the transfer (copying) will be
stopped in the middle.
≥The recording is divided into titles every time the tape index
signals are detected.
When “Time Limit” is set to “On” in Step 5 above:
≥The recording mode is automatically determined by estimating
the remaining capacity of the disc for transfer (copying) of the
contents equivalent to the recording time set from the start point
of the transfer (copying) on the video cassette (unrecorded
parts will also be recorded).
≥The recording is not divided into titles.
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
VHS
Time Limit
Off
DVD
Mode
VHS-Video
Time Limit
SP
Destination Capacity:
2:00
Off
(1)Make sure “Time Limit” is
selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Time Limit” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Select time limit (“On” or “Off”) with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥“When you select “Off”, proceed to Step (6) below.
(4)Press [3, 4] to select “Set time” and press [ENTER].
(5)Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4] to
set the recording time, and then press [ENTER].
≥You can also set the set time with the numeric buttons.
≥Maximum recording time is 8 hours.
(6)Press [2].
(7)Press [4].
51
RQTV0141
Transferring (Copying)
Transfer (Copying) from DVD
You can transfer (copy) titles recorded on a disc° onto a tape with
one touch of the button.
In One Touch Transfer (copying), all contents on the disc are
automatically copied onto the tape.
° Available discs for transfer (copying) onto tape are
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›].
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
:, 9
∫
ADD/DLT
CH
DVD
≥Insert the disc containing the program to be copied (l 24).
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
SKIP/INDEX
STOP
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
CH
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
FF
PLAY
CM SKIP
1
;
VHS
≥ Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
(l 11, 24)
≥Confirm that the remaining tape time is sufficient for recording.
(l 40)
≥Select the recording mode. (l 26)
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
ENTER
SUB MENU
A
T
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
RETURN
B
REC
COPYING
SD CARD/DV IN
[1] Press and hold [VHS —] on the main unit for
about 3 seconds or more (until “START” on the
unit’s display terminates flashing).
≥Check if transfer (copying) starts
properly.
≥Copying is automatically completed
when playback of the disc is finished
or the tape reaches its end.
∫ To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press [∫, STOP] or press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds
or more.
Notes
≥While One Touch Transfer (Copying) is activated, a scheduled
recording cannot be started.
≥When the transfer (copying) is not started or not executed, the
“COPYING” indicator blinks for about 7 seconds. Check to make
sure the unit is properly prepared.
≥If you start transfer (copying) when resume function is activated,
the DVD is copied from the beginning of the title which you
stopped.
52
RQTV0141
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
∫ To set for the
registration
∫ GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer
(Copying)
VHS
SP
Video
0
DVD
DVD
≥Insert the disc containing the program to be copied (l 24).
VHS
≥ Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
(l 11, 24)
≥Confirm that the remaining tape time is sufficient for recording.
(l 40)
07
DVD
Video
SP
∫ To Change the setting
Create List
0
Video
Recording Mode
SP
[6]
Make sure to select
“Start Copying” and
press [ENTER].
VHS
Mode
(1)Make sure “Mode” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Recording Mode” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Select recording mode (SP, EP or VP) with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
[5] Register titles and playlists for transfer
(copying).
≥If you are going to transfer a registered list without making any
changes to it, press [4], then skip to step 6.
--
VHS
SP
ENTER
Cancel All
Content Type
--
Video
Copy
DVD
---
ENTER
∫ To change the setting
Copying Direction
2:00 (SP)
8 10/25 Mon
ABC
--
≥Set “Source” to “DVD”.
≥If you are not going to change the copy direction, press [4],
then skip to step 4.
≥If you are not going to change
the recording mode, press [4],
then skip to step 5.
08
10 10/25 Mon
123
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Copy” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[3] Set “Copying Direction”.
SP
SP
DVD-RAM
While both DVD and VHS are stopped
(1)Make sure “Copying Direction” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Source” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “DVD” Copy
and press [ENTER].
Cancel All
Source
Copying Direction
≥When you set “Source” to
Destination
Mode
“DVD”, “VHS” is
automatically selected on
“Destination”.
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
VHS
Video
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
[4] Set the recording mode.
6:00
0:00 ( 0%)
No.
Size
Title Name
(1)Make sure “Create List” is
New Entry (Total = 0)
Mode
selected and press [1].
Create List
(2)Make sure “New Entry (Total
= 0)” is selected and press
Copy
[ENTER].
Current Remaining:
6:00
Cancel All
Total list size:
0:00 ( 0%)
(3)Press [A] to select “Video” or
Copying Direction
No.
Size
Title Name
New Entry (Total = 0)
press [B] to select “Playlists”.
Mode
≥You can also select the view
by selecting “Other View”
from the SUB MENU.
1Press [SUB MENU].
2Make sure “Other View” is
Create List
selected and press
Video
Playlists
[ENTER] twice.
(4)Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select
the title or playlist and press
[ENTER].
≥You can register multiple
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
titles or playlists to the
SUB MENU
Select Previous
Next
copying list by repeating the
above steps 2 to 4.
Copy
Current Remaining:
6:00
(“To edit the transfer
Cancel All
Total list size:
2:30 (42%)
Copying Direction
Size
No.
Title Name
(copying) list” l 54)
01 2:00 SP (33%) ABC
Mode
02 0:30 SP ( 7%) 123
≥“To show other pages”
New Entry (Total = 2)
(l below)
Create List
≥“Multiple editing” (l below)
Page 01/01
Start Copying
Create a Copying list.
(5)Press [2].
SUB MENU
≥Before pressing [2], make
Registered titles
sure that the value on
“Copying list” is smaller than
the value on “Current Remaining”.
(6)Press [4].
When you finish creating the
Copy
Cancel All
copying list,
DVD
You can transfer (copy) multiple titles or playlists recorded on a disc
onto a tape in combination.
≥Available discs for transfer (copy) onto tape are [RAM] [-RW‹VR›].
≥Since you cannot create playlists on +RW, you cannot copy those.
[+RW]
VHS-Video
Current Remaining:
Total list size:
Cancel All
Copying Direction
[RAM] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[1]
Copy
Transferring (Copying)
M6VP&PC.book 53 ページ
[7]
≥The confirmation screen
appears.
Select “Yes” with [2] and
≥Transfer (copying) is started.
Copying Direction
DVD
VHS
Mode
Video
SP
Create List
2
Press ENTER to start copying.
Start Copying
ENTER
press [ENTER].
∫ To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
Various operations
∫ To show other pages
Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP].
≥Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER] to show other pages.
∫ Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
≥When you switch between the “Video” and “Playlists” tab, the
check mark is canceled.
≥Titles or playlists are registered to the copying list in ascending
order of title number.
53
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 54 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Transferring (Copying)
∫ Transfer (Copying) a DVD-Video, finalized
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, or +R DL
To edit the transfer (copying) list
Select the item in step 5 (4). (l 53)
[1] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press
[SUB MENU].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[ENTER].
Clear All
Add
Remove
Move
Clear All:
Clear all items registered on the transfer (copying) list.
≥Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the transfer (copying) list.
≥Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles and playlists to be added
and press [ENTER].
Remove:
Remove the selected item.
≥Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥Multiple editing is possible. (l 53)
You can transfer (copy) the contents of a disc being played onto a
tape for the set time while playing the disc.
≥Operations and on screen displays during transfer
(copying) are also recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be transferred (copied).
≥The following cannot be transferred (copied): DVD-Audio, Video
CD, Audio CD and so on.
After performing steps 1 to 4 of “GUI (Graphical User Interface)
Transfer (Copying)” (l 53),
[5] Set “Time Limit”.
≥If you are not going to change
the setting, press [4], then
skip to step 6.
∫ Setting the unit to
transfer (copy)
according to the set time
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the transfer
(copying) list.
≥Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [ENTER].
DVD
Cancel All
Copying Direction
DVD
Time Limit
On
Set time
2:00
VHS
Mode
SP
DVD-Video
Time Limit
Current Remaining:
2:00
2:00
Set the time limit.
Start Copying
(1)Make sure “Time Limit” is
selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Time Limit” is selected and press [ENTER].
To cancel all registered transfer (copying) settings and lists
After performing steps 1 to 4 (l 53)
[1] Press [3, 4] to select
Copy
“Cancel All” and press
Cancel All
Copying Direction
[ENTER].
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
Press ENTER to cancel all settings.
Mode
and press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be canceled in the following
situations.
- When a title or a playlist has been recorded or erased at the
transfer (copying) source.
- When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit
or open the tray.
Video
Copy
≥Setting the unit to transfer (copy) all the content on the disc
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [ENTER].
(4)Press [2].
≥Setting the transfer (copying) time
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [ENTER].
(4)Press [3, 4] to select “Set time” and press [ENTER].
(5)Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4] to
set the recording time, and then press [ENTER].
≥You can also set the set time with the numeric buttons.
≥Maximum recording time is 8 hours.
(6)Press [2].
(7)Press [4].
VHS
SP
[6] Make sure “Start
Copying” is selected
and press [ENTER].
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
DVD
VHS
Mode
Press ENTER to start copying.
Press [2] to select “Yes” and
Time Limit
press [ENTER] to start transfer
(copy).
Start Copying
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins
from title 1 when “First Title” is selected from the “Playback will
start with:” menu when finalizing the disc (l 61).
When the top menu is
My favorite
01/02
displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to
DVD-Video
SP
2:00
ENTER
[7]
select the title you want
to start transferring
(copying), and press
[ENTER].
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
Chapter 3
04
Chapter 4
05
Chapter 5
06
Chapter 6
07
Chapter 7
Previous
08
Chapter 8
Play
Next
≥While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time.
≥After the last title on the disc has finished playing, the top
menu is recorded until the set time is reached.
∫ To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press [∫, STOP] or press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds
or more.
Notes
≥The screen on the right (screen saver) is
recorded at the beginning.
≥It is recorded as 1 title from the start of transfer
(copying) to the end (even if there are multiple
programs).
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top menu does not
display automatically, press [1, PLAY] to start.
≥REC only appears on the unit’s display when transferring from
DVD-Video.
54
RQTV0141
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Transfer (Copying) still picture
∫ Copying all the still pictures on a card
—Copy All Pictures
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
Numeric
buttons
∫
[SD] > [RAM]
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
VOLUME
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
≥Release protection (disc l 60, cartridge l 60). [RAM]
≥Insert a disc and confirm there is sufficient empty space for
recording on it (l 24, 40).
≥Inserting, Removing the SD card. (l 11)
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the SD drive.
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
STOP
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
[1]
FF
PLAY
1
CM SKIP
ENTER
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Other Functions” and
press [ENTER].
[3] Press [3, 4] to select “Copy all Pictures” and
press [ENTER].
Copy All Pictures (JPEG)
Copy from
\DCIM
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
Transferring (Copying)
M6VP&PC.book 55 ページ
SD card
Copy to
DVD
\JPEG\DCIM001
RETURN
Copy all pictures (JPEG) in the card
≥If there is a multiple number of higher folders recognizable, you
can switch them using [2, 1].
F Rec
[4] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy” and press
[ENTER].
[RAM] [SD]
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(l 8).
≥Still pictures recorded on CD-R or CD-RW cannot be copied.
[SD]
Put the card in the slot, and the menu (l below) is automatically
displayed. Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures” and press
[ENTER]. Then you can continue from step 4 right.
SD Card operations
SD Card inserted.
Select an action or press RETURN.
Go to Album View
Copy pictures
ENTER
Notes
≥When copying the still pictures on a album by folder basis
(l 56, To register on a folder by folder basis) or card by card
basis (l right, Copy All Pictures), files other than the still picture
files inside the folder will also be copied. (This does not apply to
the lower folders contained inside the folders.)
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing
still pictures.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum, copying will
stop partway through.
≥When a name has not been input for the copy source folder, it is
possible that this folder’s name will not be the same on the copy
destination. It is recommended that you input a folder name
before copying (l 48).
≥Print number setting (DPOF) is not copied.
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the
copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
∫ To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer
(Copying)
[RAM] [SD]
[1]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”and press
[ENTER].
[3] Set “Copying Direction”.
≥If you are not going to change the copy direction, press [4],
then skip to step 4.
∫ To change the setting
(1)Make sure “Copying Direction” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Source” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Press [3, 4] to select the
Copy
drive and press [ENTER].
Cancel All
SD card
Source
Copying Direction
(4)Press [3, 4] to select
Destination DVD
Mode
“Destination” and press
[ENTER].
(5)Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
≥The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
(6)Press [2].
(7)Press [4].
Picture
High Speed
[4] Press [4] to select “Create List”.
≥“Mode” does not need to be set as “Content Type” and
“Recording Mode” are automatically set.
55
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 56 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Transferring (Copying)
[5] Register still pictures
for transfer (copying).
Copy
Destination capacity:
Cancel All
Picture/Folder
4341MB
DVD/VHS
Picture
Copying Direction
No.
Size
Title Name
≥If you are going to transfer a
New Entry (Total = 0)
Mode
registered list without making
Create List
any changes to it, press [4],
then skip to step 6.
≥You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same list.
SD card
DVD
Picture
High Speed
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
0
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
(1)Make sure “Create List” is
Copy
selected and press [1].
Destination capacity: 4341MB
Cancel All
Picture
Picture/Folder
Copying Direction
(2)Press [3, 4] to select
No.
Size
Title Name
New Entry (Total = 0)
“Picture/Folder” and press
Mode
[ENTER].
Create List
(3)Press [3, 4] to select
“Folder” and press [ENTER].
(4)Press [3, 4] to select “New Entry (Total = 0)” and press
[ENTER].
(5)Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
≥You can register multiple still folders to the copying list by
repeating the above steps 4 – 5.
(Copying list display and convenient functions: l right)
≥“To show other pages” l below
≥“Multiple editing” l below
(6)Press [2].
(7)Press [4].
SD card
DVD
Picture
High Speed
0
[6]
When you finish creating the copying list,
Make sure to select “Start Copying” and press
[ENTER].
≥For individual still pictures only
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.
Folder
New folder
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
- New folder
---
[7] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥Transfer (copying) is started.
∫ To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
Numeric
buttons
RESET
:, 9
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
INPUT SELECT
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
SKIP/INDEX
STOP
∫
CH, W, X
CH
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
FF
PLAY
1
;
CM SKIP
SCHEDULE
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
ENTER
SUB MENU
µ
REC MODE
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
(1)Make sure “Create List” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “New Entry (Total = 0)” is selected and press
[ENTER].
(3)Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a still picture and press
[ENTER].
≥You can register multiple still pictures to the copying list by
repeating the above steps 2 to 3.
(Copying list display and convenient functions: l right)
≥“To show other pages” l below
≥“Multiple editing” l below
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
∫ To register individual still pictures
DRIVE
SELECT
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
To edit the transfer (copying) list
Clear All
Select the item in step 5–(3) (for a still picture) or
5–(5) (for a folder) (l left)
Add
[1] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press
Remove
[SUB MENU].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press [ENTER].
Clear All:
Clear all items registered on the transfer (copying) list.
≥Press [2] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the transfer (copying) list.
≥Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder to be
added and press [ENTER].
Remove:
Remove the selected item.
≥Press [2] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥Multiple editing is possible. (l left)
To cancel all registered transfer (copying) settings and lists
After performing steps 1 to 2 (l 55) Copy
[1] Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel
Cancel All
Copying Direction
All” and press [ENTER].
[2] Press [2] to select “Yes” and
Press ENTER to cancel all settings.
Mode
press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be canceled in the following situations.
- When a title or still picture has been recorded or erased at the
transfer (copying) source.
- When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
DVD
Video
VHS
SP
∫ To return to the previous screen
To select another folder
Press [RETURN].
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
≥If you want to switch to another higher folder (l below)
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
Various operations
∫ To show other pages
Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP].
≥Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER] to show other pages.
∫ Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
≥Still picture or folder are registered to the copying list in
ascending order of number.
Create List
Select pictures
SD CARD
Folder
0001
103__DVD
0002
0003
0004
001
002
003
004
---
≥You can also select folders by entering a 3-digit number
with the numeric buttons.
e.g.:
“5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
To switch to another higher folder
≥Only when selecting the source folder
If there is a multiple number of higher
folders recognizable,
While the screen on the right appears
[1] Press [SUB MENU].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Select Root Folder” and press [ENTER].
[3] Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [ENTER].
[4] Press [3, 4] to select the desired folder and press [ENTER].
001
002
003
004
---
56
RQTV0141
\DCIM\100__DVD
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
103__DVD
\DCIM\100__DVD
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
103__DVD
M6VP&PC.book 57 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Transferring (Copying)
≥Start playing the video cassette and find the recording start
point.
[4] Press [;, PAUSE], then press [¥, REC].
≥Put the unit in recording standby mode.
IN 2
S VIDEO
VIDEO
[5] Start play on the external device.
[6] Press [;, PAUSE] at the point where you want
to start recording.
L /MONO AUDIO R
∫ To skip unwanted parts
(1)
(2)
(3)
Press [;, PAUSE] to pause recording. (Press again to restart
recording.)
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫, STOP].
(4)
(1) S-Video cable (not supplied)
(2) Audio/Video cable (not supplied)
A Yellow (VIDEO)
B White (L)
C Red (R)
(3) DV cable (IEEE 1394 4-pin, not supplied)
(4) External device (Playback equipment)
Before connecting any cables, first make sure that the power
for the unit and the external device are off. Then, after
connecting cables, turn on both.
Recording from an external device
When connecting the IN2 input terminals on the front of the unit
≥You can also connect to the IN1 input terminals on the rear of the
unit.
Notes
≥When recording using the unit’s input terminals, only the sound
received at the time of recording will be recorded. As long as
secondary audio that is recorded on the media in the external
device is not output to the unit in play, it is not recorded.
≥If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural, connect to
L/MONO. (Both left and right channels are recorded when
connected through L/MONO.)
≥The S-VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
Preparation
DVD [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Release protection (disc l 60, cartridge l 60). [RAM]
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
VHS
≥Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
(l 24)
≥Select VHS side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1] Press [REC MODE] to select the recording
mode. (DVD l 26, VHS l 26)
≥DVD [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
- It is also possible to perform Flexible Recording (FR). (l 29)
[2]
While stopped
Press [CH, X, W] or [INPUT SELECT] to select
the input channel for the equipment you have
connected.
≥Select IN1 or IN2.
DVD
Follow the above steps 1 to 2.
[3] Start play on the external device.
[4] Press [¥, REC] at the point where you want to
start recording.
VHS
For your reference
≥Almost all videos and DVD software on sale have been treated to
prevent illegal copying. Such software cannot be recorded.
DV camcorder recording
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Programs are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are
created at each break in the images and the playlist is created
automatically. [RAM]
Preparation
≥Turn on the main unit and DV equipment.
≥Select the type of audio recording from “Select Audio Channel for
DV Input” in the Audio menu. (l 64)
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video
camcorder), you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape
only.
≥Pause play on the DV equipment at the point you want recording to
start.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
[1]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Other Functions” and
press [ENTER].
[3] Press [3, 4] to select “DV Camcorder Rec.”
and press [ENTER].
[4] Press [2, 1] to select “Rec.” and press
[ENTER].
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [ENTER] to finish DV
automatic recording.
To stop recording
Press [∫, STOP]. The confirmation screen appears. Press [ENTER].
Notes
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder)
can be connected to the unit via the DV IN terminal.
≥If you use video camcorders from other manufacturer’s these are
not guaranteed to work.
≥If the DV equipment is in a mode for operating the SD card, it is not
possible to record with “DV Camcorder Rec.”.
≥It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV
equipment.
≥The DV IN terminal on this unit is for use with DV equipment only.
(It cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape in the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for Recording
from an external device (lleft).
Follow the above steps 1 to 2.
[3] Press [1, PLAY].
57
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 58 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Entering text
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character you
want to enter and press [ENTER].
DVD/VHS
POWER
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
≥To erase a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;, PAUSE].
POWER
VOLUME
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numeric
buttons
RESET
:, 9
STOP
DELETE
DELETE
PLAY
;
CM SKIP
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
A
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
Characters
44
40
[SD]
≥Album
Characters
36
Press [RETURN].
≥Characters will not be saved.
∫ To recall a saved phrases
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase List” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] to select “Phrase List”.
[2] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the phrase to be recalled and
press [ENTER].
∫ To erase saved phrases
[1] Show Enter Name screen.
Refer to the following pages regarding display of the Enter Name
Screen.
≥Title
(l 42)
≥Title (scheduled recording)
(l 30)
≥Disc
(l 60)
≥Playlist
(l 45)
≥Album
(l 48)
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Title Name
_
RQTV0141
V
You can save frequently used phrases and recall them later.
Maximum number of saved phrases: 20
Maximum number of characters per phrase: 20
≥After entering the phrase (step 1 to 2, “Entering text”)
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase Save” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [9, SKIP] to select “Phrase Save”.
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Save” and press [ENTER].
≥Press [RETURN] to cancel.
Preparation
≥Insert a disc or card.
≥Release protection (disc l 60, title l 42, album l 48, cartridge
l 60, card l 60). [RAM] [SD]
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive (DVD or SD).
1 1
2
3
5
6
7
8
2 A
B
C
a
b
c
i j
3 D
E
F
d
e
f
/
l %
4 G
H
I
g
h
i
fl
$
5 J
K
L
j
l
O N @
6 M N
O
k
m n
o
[
]
_
7 P
8 T
Q
R
p
q
r
s
(
U
V
t
u
v
{
}
)
-
9 W X
0 . ,
Y
Z
w
x
?
!
"
'
y
:
z
;
\
`
|
^
4
S
Space
ENTER
U
S
∫ To save phrases
Note
≥If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
58
R
After you have finished naming
RETURN
B
F Rec
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Title
≥Disc
Set
[3]
∫ To cancel in the middle
The maximum number of characters:
[RAM]
Characters
≥Title
64
≥Title (scheduled recording)
44
≥Playlist
64
≥Album
36
≥Disc
64
π
Q
≥Save/recall phrased (l below)
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
Erase
Phrase Save
Phrase List
O
The title is entered and the screen disappears.
Entering text
;
7 P
8 T
L
7
Press [∫, STOP].
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
K
7
6 M N
7
≥To enter space
Press [¢, CANCEL] and press
[ENTER].
FF
REW
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
SUB MENU
(1)Press 7 to move to the 7th row.
(2)Press 7 twice to highlight “R”.
(3)Press [ENTER].
ADD/DLT
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
∫
≥Using the numeric buttons to enter characters
e.g., entering the letter “R”.
5 J
CH
9
0
&
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase List” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] to select “Phrase List”.
[2] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the phrase to be erased.
[3] Press [SUB MENU] to show “Erase Phrase” and press
[ENTER].
[4] Press [2, 1] to select “Erase” and press [ENTER].
[5] Press [RETURN].
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the TOP MENU
after finalization (l 61). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the TOP MENU can be previewed in “Top Menu
Preview (Finalized Disc)” window.
Title Name
_
Top Menu Preview
(Finalized Disc)
1 1
2
3
5
6
7
8
2 A
B
C
a
b
c
i j
3 D
E
F
d
e
f
/
l %
4 G
H
I
g
h
i
fl
$
4
9
0
&
Deleting title or pictures
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l 60, cartridge l 60, card l 60).
[RAM] [SD]
≥Insert a disc or card.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive (DVD or SD).
Selecting recorded titles or pictures to
delete – Delete Navigator
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
≥A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain
before proceeding.
≥You cannot delete while recording.
≥[RAM] [SD] When a recorded title (or a still picture) is deleted the
available disc or card space will increase by the amount deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase after
deletion.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases when the last
recorded title is deleted. (The recording space may increase
slightly when other titles are deleted.)
[1]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
DELETE Navigator
Title View
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
Once title is deleted, it cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
[1]
During Play
Press [DELETE].
[2] Press [2] to select
“Delete” and press
[ENTER].
For your reference
≥You cannot delete while recording or transferring (copying).
≥[RAM] [SD] When a recorded title (or a still picture) is deleted the
available disc or card space will increase by the amount deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase after
erasing.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases when the last
recorded title is deleted. (The recording space may increase
slightly when other titles are deleted.)
DVD-RAM
[2] Press [3, 4] to select
“Delete” and press
[ENTER].
∫ To switch to the other
view [RAM]
07
08
---
--
--
--
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
Press [B] to select Picture
View.
Press [A] to select Title View.
[3] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press
[ENTER].
∫ To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to show
other pages.
∫ Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
[4] Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
59
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 60 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
DVD and card Management
Providing a disc with a name
DVD/VHS
POWER
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
POWER
VOLUME
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
[4] Select “Disc Name” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
Movie
DVD
MANAGEMENT Titles
7
Free Time 0 : 42 (SP)
DVD-RAM Used Time 0 : 58
SLOW/SEARCH
FF
REW
SKIP/INDEX
STOP
Refer to “Entering text” (l 58).
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥With a finalized discs and +RW, the name is displayed on the Top
Menu.
CH
PAUSE
Disc Name
PLAY
Disc Protection
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
Setting the protection
CTIONS
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
FU N
DIRECT NAVIGAT
OR
SCHEDULE
3, 4, 2
ENTER
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
[4] Select “Disc Protection” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
RETURN
CREATE
This allows you to protect the whole disc from accidental erasure
and release disc protection.
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
≥To protect
Disc Protection
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l right, cartridge l right, card l right).
[RAM] [SD]
≥Insert a disc or card.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive (DVD or SD).
[1]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
e.g., [RAM]
FUNCTIONS
DVD-RAM
Cartridge Protection Off
Disc Protection Off
Playback
Playlist
Program
Flexible Recording
delete
DV Camcorder Rec.
Copy
Setup
Other Functions
Disc Name
No
On
Delete All Titles
Format Disc (DVD)
ENTER
≥To release protection
Disc Protection
Cancel disc protection.
All write restrictions will
be removed.
DVD
MANAGEMENT Titles
7
Free Time 0 : 42 (SP)
DVD-RAM Used Time 0 : 58
Disc Name
No
Off
Delete All Titles
Format Disc (DVD)
ENTER
DVD Management
∫ Protection of cartridge disc or card
Titles
7
Used Time 0 : 58
Free Time 0 : 42 (SP)
[RAM] (With a cartridge)
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect
position, you cannot record to, edit, or erase
from the disc.
PROTECT
[SD]
≥Switch the write-protect switch to the “Lock” position.
LOCK
DVD-RAM
DVD
MANAGEMENT Titles
7
Free Time 0 : 42 (SP)
DVD-RAM Used Time 0 : 58
Disc Protection
Yes
Yes
[3] Select “DVD Management” or “Card
Management” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
DVD
MANAGEMENT
Set disc protection.
Note: Protected discs cannot be renamed
or have their content changed,
but can still be re-formatted.
Disc Protection
ENTER
RETURN
e.g., [RAM]
On
Disc Name
Disc Protection
Off
Delete All Titles
Format Disc (DVD)
Deleting all titles and playlists
–Delete All Titles
ENTER
≥When SD has been selected, “Format memory card” only is
displayed.
[4] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item and press
[ENTER].
You can change various settings.
≥After this operation, follow the desired operation.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[4] Select “Delete All Titles” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
[6] Select “Start” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥A message appears when finished.
[7] Press [ENTER].
60
RQTV0141
Notes
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Deleting all contents of a disc or card
–Format
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding.
The contents are deleted when you format a disc even if you have
set protection.
[4] Select “Format Disc (DVD)” or “Format memory
card” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
e.g.; [RAM]
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment
–Finalize
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
≥Make selection from “Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
–Playback will start with:” before finalizing the disc. (l lower left)
You can play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R
or +R DL on compatible DVD players by finalizing it on the unit,
effectively making it into DVD-Video that complies with DVD-Video
standards.
The menu you create with the unit can also be used on DVD players.
[4] Select “Finalize” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
Format Disc (DVD)
Finalize
Formatting the disc will erase all contents.
This will take approximately 1 minute.
Do you want to continue?
Finalizing will take approximately ≤ minutes.
Do you want to continue? (Required for
playback on compatible DVD players.)
Yes
No
[6] Select “Start” with [2] and press [ENTER].
Yes
Finalize
Finalizing is necessary to enable playback
of the disc on compatible DVD players.
Once finalized, titles cannot be added
to the disc.
Continue finalizing the disc?
Protected contents will be erased too.
Are you sure you want to continue?
Cancel
≥Formatting starts.
≥A message appears when formatting is finished.
Notes
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however it may take
up to a maximum of 70 minutes [RAM].
≥Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while
formatting. This can render the disc unusable.
[7] Press [ENTER].
∫ To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
Notes
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL and CD-R/RW cannot be formatted.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
≥The disc cannot be formatted if the write protect tab (l 60) is
switched to “PROTECT”. Release the protection to continue.
≥The message “Unable to format” appears when trying to format
discs the unit cannot use.
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first
–Playback will start with:
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
Select whether to show the top menu after finalizing the disc. Do this
before finalizing the disc.
No
[6] Select “Start” with [2] and press [ENTER].
Format Disc (DVD)
Start
DVD and card Management
M6VP&PC.book 61 ページ
Start
Cancel
≥Finalizing starts.
≥You cannot cancel finalizing.
≥A message appears when finalizing is finished.
Notes
≥Finalizing can take a few minutes, up to a maximum of
15 minutes, depending on the remaining space on the disc.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] up to 60 minutes)
≥Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while
finalizing. This can render the disc unusable.
[7] Press [ENTER].
Notes
≥When finalizing a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may
take longer than displayed on the confirmation screen
(approximately 4 times).
≥After finalizing
- The disc becomes play-only and you can no longer record or edit
it. [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL]
- You can record and edit the disc after formatting (l left) although
it becomes play-only after finalizing. [-RW‹V›]
- DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +R DL
finalized on the unit may not be playable on other players
depending on the condition of the recording.
- There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters
during play.
- Titles are divided into about 5-minute chapters° ([-R]DL] [+R]DL] 8
minutes)
° This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
≥Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.
http://www.panasonic.com/playDVD-R
[4] Select “Playback will start with:” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[5] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item and press
[ENTER].
Playback will start with:
DVD's Top Menu
First Title on DVD
≥DVD’s Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
≥First Title on DVD:The disc content is played without
displaying the top menu.
61
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 62 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
DVD and card Management
Creating Top Menu
–Create DVD Top Menu
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
Í
DRIVE
SELECT
Numeric
buttons
[+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
VOLUME
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you to create the menu before playing a
+RW disc on other equipment.
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
[4] Press [3, 4] to select “Create DVD Top Menu”
and press [ENTER].
[5] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
[6] Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press
[ENTER].
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
FF
REW
SKIP/INDEX
STOP
CH
PAUSE
PLAY
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
[7] Press [ENTER].
µ
TIONS
FU N C
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
Enabling the second layer on DL (dualor double-layer on single side) discs to
be recordable
–Close First Layer
[-R]DL] [+R]DL]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
DVD-R DL and +R DL discs have two layer of recording surface on
one side. this unit does not offer seamless recording on two layers.
Recording stops when space on the first layer becomes full. You
must close the first layer to start recording on the second layer.
Closing makes the first layer unavailable for recording (edition is still
available. You cannot cancel closing. Make certain before
proceeding.
[4] Press [3, 4] to select “Close First Layer” and
press [ENTER].
[5] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
[6] Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press
[ENTER].
Closing the layer starts. You cannot cancel closing.
Closing the layer can take several minutes, up to a maximum of
30 minutes, depending on the remaining space on the first layer.
Note
≥Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while closing the
layer. This will render the disc unusable.
[7] Press [ENTER].
∫ To confirm the layer you can record
You can confirm the remaining recording time on the layer you can
record.
DVD
MANAGEMENT
DVD-R DL
Titles
7
Used Time 0 : 58
Free Time 0 : 42 (SP)
Of the first layer
Disc Name
Playback will start with: Top Menu
Finalize
Close First Layer
ENTER
Notes
≥You cannot close the first layer when it has no recording.
≥By closing the layer, you can record or edit discs that have been
recorded on the second layer by other equipment.
62
RQTV0141
Notes
≥Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again.
≥You cannot use the title menu for playing on this unit.
M6VP&PC.book 63 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Common procedures
Summary of settings
Use the following procedure to change the settings if necessary.
[1]
While stopped
FUNCTIONS
No Disc
No Disc
Press [FUNCTIONS].
≥
Program
[2] Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with
[3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
This description shows the initial settings for the unit. For
details on menu operation. (l left)
≥Underlined items are the factory default settings.
indicates settings effective for both DVD and
/
VHS.
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
(1)
(2)
≥
indicates settings effective for DVD only.
≥
indicates settings effective for VHS only.
∫ Channel
/
Signal Source (RF IN) (l 19)
(3)
Select to suit the type of antenna you are using.
[Antenna] [CableTV]
Set Channels Automatically (l 19)
Setup
Off Timer
Remote Control Code
Clock Settings
6 Hours
Set Code 1
Setup
Quick Start
On
Disc
Restore Default Settings
Channel
(1) Menus
(2) Items
(3) Options
Video
Audio
Manual Channel Captions (l 20)
∫ Setup
Off Timer
/
Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used.
[2 Hours] [6 Hours] [Off]
Display
TV Screen
VHS
Preset Channel Captions (l 20)
ENTER
[4] Select a menu with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
[5] Select an item to be changed with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[6] Select an option with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
≥Some options require different operations. Follow the
displayed instructions.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN]. Even if you have changed an option, the change
is not activated until you press [ENTER].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
For your reference
≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Entering a password (Ratings)
You can limit play of DVDs unsuitable for some audiences (children,
for example). Play and changes to the settings are not possible
unless you enter a password.
Preparation
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
When setting ratings
The password screen is shown when you select levels 0 to 7.
[1] Input a 4-digit password with the numeric buttons.
≥If you enter a wrong number, press [2] to erase it before you
press [ENTER].
≥Do not forget your password.
[2] Press [ENTER].
[3] Press [ENTER].
The password is entered and the unit is locked.
Remote Control Code (l 21)
[Set Code 1]
[Set Code 2]
DVD and card Management/Changing the unit’s settings
Changing the unit’s settings
[Set Code 3]
Clock Settings
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Set Clock Automatically (l 22)
Set Clock Manually (l 19)
Adjust Time Zone (l 22)
This corrects the time set in Auto Clock Setting.
The status is not displayed on the Setup menu when the Auto
Clock Setting is not set.
[j1] [0] [i1]
Quick Start
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM°
° From the power off state, recording on DVD-RAM starts about
1 second after first pressing the [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] and then
sequentially pressing the [¥, REC] (Quick Start Mode).
Power consumption is also higher when the unit is turned off if this is
set to “On”.
[On] [Off]
Restore Default Settings
This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the clock,
channel settings, ratings level, and on-screen language.
[Yes] [No]
Now, when you insert a DVD-Video that exceeds the ratings limit
you set, a message appears on the TV.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
When changing ratings
The password screen is shown when you select “Ratings” (l 64)
[1] Input a 4-digit password with the numeric buttons and press
[ENTER].
Unlock Recorder:
Change Password:
Change Level:
Temporary Unlock:
To unlock the unit and return the rating to 8
To change your password
To change the rating level
To temporarily unlock the unit (the unit locks
again if you switch it to standby or open the
disc tray)
[2] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
Actual screens depend on the operation. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
63
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 64 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Changing the unit’s settings
≥ Underlined items are the factory default settings.
Output Level (Component)
∫ Disc
Settings for Playback
Adjusts the black level of the output signal from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT (Y/PB/PR) terminals.
[Lighter] [Normal] [Darker]
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Ratings (“Entering a password (Ratings)” l 63)
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
[8 No Limit]: All DVD-Video can be played.
[1] to [7]:
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
[0 Lock All]: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
Changing ratings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
[Unlock Recorder] [Change Password]
[Change Level] [Temporary Unlock]
Play DVD-Audio in Video Mode
Select “Video Mode (Video On)” to play DVD-Video content on
some DVD-Audio.
[Video Mode (Video On)] [Audio Mode (Video Off)]
Video Mode
(Video ON)
The setting returns to “Audio Mode (Video Off)”
when you change the disc or turn the unit off.
Audio Language
[English]
[French]
[Spanish]
[Original]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Subtitle Language
[Automatic]
[English]
[French]
[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Menu Language
[English]
[French]
[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Choose the language for audio, subtitles and disc menus. [DVD-V]
≥If a language which is not recorded is selected, or if languages
are already fixed on the disc, the language set as the default on
the disc will be played instead.
Original
The original language of each disc will be selected.
Other ¢¢¢¢
This is the language code setting.
Input a code number with the numeric buttons.
(l 66, “Language code list”)
Automatic
If the language selected for “Audio Language” is not available,
subtitles of that language will automatically appear if available
on the disc.
Settings for Recording
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
∫ Audio
Dynamic Range Compression
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range (l 76) for easier listening in low volume.
[On] [Off]
Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type (SAP)
when recording or transferring (copying) to DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format) or +R. (You cannot select the audio type on the unit
when recording audio to DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+R from an external device. Select it on the external device.)
[Main] [Secondary Audio Program (SAP)]
Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through
the unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (l 16).
Press [ENTER] to display the menu.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz or
88.2 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the above
settings if the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz
or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy protection.
[On]
[Off]
On
Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment cannot process
signals with sampling frequency of 96 kHz or
88.2 kHz.)
Off
Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment can process signals
with sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
Dolby Digital
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream” which
processes Dolby Digital signals on other connected
equipment or to convert the signals to “PCM (2ch)” on the unit
before output.
[Bitstream] [PCM]
Bitstream
When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment having Dolby Digital logo.
PCM
When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment that doesn’t have Dolby Digital logo°.
Recording Time in EP Mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode
[l 26, “Recording modes and approximate recording times (DVD)”].
[EP-Extended Play (6H)] [EP-Extended Play (8H)]
EP-Extended You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
Play (6H)
disc.
EP-Extended You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
Play (8H)
disc.
DTS
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream” which
processes DTS signals on other connected equipment
or to convert the signals to “PCM (2ch)” on the unit
before output.
[Bitstream] [PCM]
∫ Video
Still Mode (paused video)
Bitstream
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play.
(l 76, “Frame and field”)
[Automatic] [Field] [Frame]
When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment having DTS logo.
PCM
When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment that doesn’t have DTS logo°.
Field
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.
Frame
Select if you cannot see small text or fine patterns
clearly when “Automatic” is selected.
Black Level Control
Select “Normal”, “Lighter” or “Darker” to adjust the black level control
to the desired setting for picture enhancement.
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Input Level
Adjusts the black level of the input signal.
[Lighter] [Darker]
Output Level (Composite/SVideo)
64
RQTV0141
Adjusts the black level of the output signal from the VIDEO OUT
and S VIDEO OUT terminal.
[Lighter] [Darker]
° Incorrect settings can cause noise to be output which can be
harmful to your ears and speakers, and audio will not be recorded
properly on media such as mini discs.
Select Audio Channel for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV
in terminal. (l 57)
[Stereo 1] [Stereo 2] [Mix]
Stereo 1
Records audio (L1, R1)
Stereo 2
Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
Mix
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
≥ Underlined items are the factory default settings.
HDMI Connection Speakers Setting
∫ Display
Status Messages
You can set the unit to output the best possible sound for your
speakers.
[Auto] [Multi Channel] [2 Channel]
Choose whether to show status messages automatically or not.
[Automatic] [Off]
On-screen Language
Choose the language for these menus and the on-screen
messages.
[English] [Español] [Français]
Blue Background
Select whether to show the blue background, normally shown when
TV reception is poor.
[On] [Off]
FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
[Bright] [Dim] [Automatic]
Automatic
Multi Channel Setting
Displayed when “Multi Channel” is selected in “HDMI Connection
Speakers Setting”
You can adjust the settings for speaker size, presence and audiodelay. (l 66)
Ctrl with HDMI
[On]
[Off]
The display turns dark during play, and reappears
momentarily if a button is pressed. When the unit is
4:3 TV Settings for DVD-Video
∫ TV Screen
TV Type (l 20)
You can select how to display the image on the TV when you watch
16:9 images (DVD-Video) on a 4:3 standard aspect TV. (l 76)
[Pan and Scan (Stretch to fit)] [Letterbox (Shrink to fit)]
Choose the setting to suit your TV and preference.
[Aspect 4:3 & 480i] [Aspect 4:3 & 480p]
[Aspect 16:9 & 480i] [Aspect 16:9 & 480p]
Functions of HDMI
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
HDMI Video Output
[On]
[Off]
HDMI Resolution
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may
be improved by changing the setting.
[Auto] [480p] [720p] [1080i]
4:3 TV Settings for DVD-RAM
You can select how to display the image on the TV when you watch
16:9 images (DVD-RAM) on a 4:3 standard aspect TV. (l 76)
[4:3 Aspect] [Pan and Scan (Stretch to fit)]
[Letterbox (Shrink to fit)]
HDMI Output Display Aspect
Settings used when 4:3 aspect video is output on the television as
16:9 aspect.
(Only effective when 720p or 1080i is selected as the output
resolution)
[Full] [Normal]
∫ VHS
Select Tape Length
Set the length of tape you are using so the unit can show the correct
remaining time.
[T120] [T160] [T180]
HDMI RGB Output Range
Effective when connected to a device that only supports RGB
output.
[Standard] [Enhanced]
HDMI Audio Output
[On]
[Off]
Jet Search (l 37)
Set the speed for Jet Search when playing EP and VP tapes.
≥It is possible to view the picture recorded in EP or VP mode at
approx. 27 or 35 times speed.
[k27] [k35]
≥Select [k27] if the picture is poor at [k35].
65
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 66 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Changing the unit’s settings
Changing the speaker setting to suit your speakers
Change the speaker setting to suit your speakers
L
Complete
To set the delay time (b)
Center
a Front (L)
b
a
ms
0.0
C
Complete
a Front (R)
(Effective only when playing multi-channel audio)
If either distance c or e is less than d, find the difference in the
relevant table and change to the recommended setting.
R
SW
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select an item (b) and
press [ENTER].
[2] Press [3, 4] change the content and press
[ENTER].
a
Subwoofer
ms
0.0
LS
a
b
(LS) Surround
RS
d Center speaker
a
(RS)
Difference
: Recommended
placement
Approx. 34 cm
To set the speaker presence and size (a)
(11/
10
Setting
feet)
1
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the speaker icon
(a) and press [ENTER].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the setting and press
[ENTER].
L
R
C
c
d
SW
Icon examples:
Surround speaker (LS)
≥Large: Select when the
Large
Small
No
speaker supports
low-frequency (under 100 Hz) reproduction.
≥Small: Select when the speaker does not support low-frequency
reproduction.
e
LS
RS
1.0 ms
Approx. 68 cm (2 /5 feet)
2.0 ms
Approx. 102 cm (33/10 feet)
3.0 ms
Approx. 136 cm (42/5 feet)
4.0 ms
Approx. 170 cm (51/2 feet)
5.0 ms
f Surround speakers
Difference
Setting
1
Approx. 170 cm (5 /2 feet)
5.0 ms
Approx. 340 cm (11 feet)
10.0 ms
Approx. 510 cm
(161/
2
feet)
15.0 ms
If the subwoofer is set to “No”, the front speakers will automatically
be set to “Large”. (In this case, we recommend connecting a
speaker that can reproduce bass below 100 Hz.)
Language code list
66
RQTV0141
Abkhazian:
Afar:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Ameharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
Basque:
Bengali, Bangla:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian:
Cambodian:
Catalan:
6566
6565
6570
8381
6577
6582
7289
6583
6589
6590
6665
6985
6678
6890
6672
6682
6671
7789
6669
7577
6765
Chinese:
Corsican:
Croatian:
Czech:
Danish:
Dutch:
English:
Esperanto:
Estonian:
Faroese:
Fiji:
Finnish:
French:
Frisian:
Galician:
Georgian:
German:
Greek:
Greenlandic:
Guarani:
Gujarati:
9072
6779
7282
6783
6865
7876
6978
6979
6984
7079
7074
7073
7082
7089
7176
7565
6869
6976
7576
7178
7185
Hausa:
Hebrew:
Hindi:
Hungarian:
Icelandic:
Indonesian:
Interlingua:
Irish:
Italian:
Japanese:
Javanese:
Kannada:
Kashmiri:
Kazakh:
Kirghiz:
Korean:
Kurdish:
Laotian:
Latin:
Latvian, Lettish:
Lingala:
7265
7387
7273
7285
7383
7378
7365
7165
7384
7465
7487
7578
7583
7575
7589
7579
7585
7679
7665
7686
7678
Lithuanian:
7684
Macedonian:
7775
Malagasy:
7771
Malay:
7783
Malayalam:
7776
Maltese:
7784
Maori:
7773
Marathi:
7782
Moldavian:
7779
Mongolian:
7778
Nauru:
7865
Nepali:
7869
Norwegian:
7879
Oriya:
7982
Pashto, Pushto: 8083
Persian:
7065
Polish:
8076
Portuguese:
8084
Punjabi:
8065
Quechua:
8185
Rhaeto-Romance: 8277
Romanian:
Russian:
Samoan:
Sanskrit:
Scots Gaelic:
Serbian:
Serbo-Croatian:
Shona:
Sindhi:
Singhalese:
Slovak:
Slovenian:
Somali:
Spanish:
Sundanese:
Swahili:
Swedish:
Tagalog:
Tajik:
Tamil:
Tatar:
8279
8285
8377
8365
7168
8382
8372
8378
8368
8373
8375
8376
8379
6983
8385
8387
8386
8476
8471
8465
8484
Telugu:
Thai:
Tibetan:
Tigrinya:
Tonga:
Turkish:
Turkmen:
Twi:
Ukrainian:
Urdu:
Uzbek:
Vietnamese:
Volapük:
Welsh:
Wolof:
Xhosa:
Yiddish:
Yoruba:
Zulu:
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
M6VP&PC.book 67 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
On the unit’s display
Page
≥An error has occurred. The number following “H” or “F” depends on the status of the unit. Check the
items in the “Error messages” section and the “Troubleshooting guide”. If the service number still
does not disappear after the check, follow the Reset procedure described below.
Reset procedure: (“The unit is on but cannot be operated.” l 69)
≥If the service numbers fail to clear, note the service numbers and contact a qualified service person.
SET (“” stands for a number.) ≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
HARD ERR
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
NoREAD
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
≥You have used a lens cleaner and it has finished. Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] to eject the disc.
PLEASE WAIT
≥Displayed when the unit is started. This is not a malfunction.
(“PLEASE” and “WAIT” are
≥The unit is carrying out its recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while “PLEASE WAIT” is
alternately displayed.)
displayed.
PROG FULL
≥There are already 16 scheduled recording programs. Delete unnecessary scheduled recording
(“PROG” and “FULL” are
programs.
alternately displayed.)
UNSUPPORT
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.
(“UNSUP” and “PORT” are
alternately displayed.)
UNFORMAT
≥You have inserted a new DVD-RW/+R/+R DL/+RW or a DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
(“UNFOR” and “MAT” are
recorded on other equipment.
alternately displayed.)
F74
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.
F75
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a internal data malfunction.
U59
≥The unit is very warm.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
U61
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is
carrying out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not
broken. Wait until the message disappears.
U71
≥The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
U72
≥The HDMI connection acts unusually.
U73
- The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
- The HDMI cable is too long.
- The HDMI cable is damaged.
U88
≥There was something unusual detected with the disc while recording, playing or transferring
(copying), there was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit
is carrying out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not
broken. Wait until the message disappears.
U99
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
Now press [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
H, F
(“” stands for a number.)
On the TV
Cannot finish recording
completely.
–
–
21
–
6, 10
24
–
–
31
7
61
Changing the unit’s settings/Messages
Messages
–
–
–
–
–
–
69
–
Page
≥The program was copy-protected.
≥The disc may be full.
≥There are already 99 recorded titles ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 recorded titles).
≥You inserted an incompatible disc (Discs recorded in PAL video, etc.).
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched.
Cannot play.
Cannot record on the disc.
Unable to format.
Please check the disc.
Cannot record. Disc is full.
≥Create space by erasing any unwanted titles. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]
Cannot record. The number of [Even if you erase recorded content from the DVD-R or +R, there is no increase in disc space. Available
recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when the last recorded title is
titles has exceeded the
deleted. (The recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.)]
maximum limit.
≥Use a new disc.
Error has occurred. Please
≥Press [ENTER] to start recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while it is recovering
press ENTER.
(“SELF CHECK” appears on the unit’s display).
No disc
≥You haven’t inserted a disc. Correctly insert a disc that the unit can play.
≥The disc is upside down. If it is a single-sided disc, insert it so the label is facing up.
No folders.
≥There is no compatible folder in this unit.
No SD Card
≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already inserted, turn off
No valid SD card.
the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.
No VHS cassette
≥A video cassette is not inserted when recording programs. Insert a video cassette with an accidental
erasure prevention tab.
≥The VHS plays back while recording on DVD. You can watch the VHS playback by connect to the
Now recording on DVD.
To watch the VHS playback,
DVD/VHS COMMON terminals.
connect a TV to DVD/VHS
COMMON OUT terminal at the
back of the unit, and select the
appropriate input on the TV.
Please change the disc.
≥There may be a problem with the disc. Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to remove it and
check it for scratches or dirt. (The unit turns off automatically after you open the tray.)
Please set the clock.
≥The clock is not set when recording programs or setting the scheduled recording. Set the clock.
The VHS cassette is
≥A video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted when recording programs. Use a
protected.
video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
This is a non-recordable disc. ≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalized DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW.
This disc is not formatted
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW. Format the disc with the unit.
properly.
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit, disc or cassette.
–
–
–
–
10
41, 59,
60
–
–
6, 10, 24
24
8
11
8
11, 24
15
10
19, 22
11
–
61
32
67
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 68 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Frequently asked questions
Set up
Page
≥You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must connect
this unit with a HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a built-in (Dolby Digital or
DTS) decoder.
≥An amplifier supporting CPPM and the HDMI standard version 1.1 must be connected to this unit to
play multi-channel audio on a DVD-Audio.
16
Can the headphones and
speakers be directly
connected to the unit?
≥You cannot directly connect to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.
16
The television has S VIDEO
IN terminal, COMPONENT
VIDEO IN terminals and
HDMI IN terminal. Which
should I connect with?
≥The output picture quality increases in the following order.
- VIDEO IN terminal, S VIDEO IN terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals and HDMI IN
terminal. However the unit will take longer to startup when this it is connected with the HDMI IN
terminal.
–
Is my TV progressive output
compatible?
≥All Panasonic TVs that have 480p input terminals are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you
have another brand of TV.
–
What equipment is
necessary to play multi
channel surround sound?
Disc
Page
Can I play DVD-Video, DVD- ≥You can play them if the video standard is NTSC.
Audio and Video CDs bought ≥However, you cannot play DVD-Video if its region number does not include “1” or “ALL”.
in another country?
≥The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play discs
that do not have a region number.
Please tell me about DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R,
+R DL and +RW
compatibility with the unit.
≥The unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW,
and plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format).
≥The unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible discs.
≥After recording but before finalizing +R, +R DL discs
- You may not be able to play and record discs on this unit after recording them on other Panasonic
products or other manufacturer’s equipment.
- You may not be able to play and record discs on other equipment after recording them on this unit.
After finalizing the disc, however, you will be able to play it on any DVD-Video compatible player.
6, 7
Please tell me about CD-R
and CD-RW compatibility
with the unit.
≥This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following standards:
CD-DA, Video CD, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF). Close the session or finalize the disc after
recording. This unit can recognize up to 99 folders (groups) and 999 files (tracks) on a disc with MP3
or still pictures (JPEG/TIFF).
≥You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with the unit.
7, 34,
35
–
6
–
7
Page
≥Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording is usually
not possible.
–
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD- ≥You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalizing the disc on this unit. It is
RW (DVD-Video format), +R,
not necessary to finalize +RW. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of
+R DL and +RW recorded on
the disc and capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible. To enable play on other DVD
the unit be played on other
players, please use “Create DVD Top Menu” in the DVD management menu.
equipment?
61
Can I record from a
commercially purchased
video cassette or DVD?
Can I record digital audio
signals using the unit?
≥You cannot record digital signals. The digital audio terminals on the unit are for output only. (The
audio recorded from a digital video camcorder using the DV automatic recording function, for
example, is recorded digitally.)
–
Can a digital audio signal
from the unit be recorded to
other equipment?
≥You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio Output”
settings to the following from the Setup menu.
- PCM Down Conversion “On”
- Dolby Digital “PCM”
- DTS “PCM”
However, only
- As long as digital recording from the disc is permitted.
- As long as the recording equipment is compatible with 48 kHz of sampling frequency.
≥You cannot record MP3 signals.
64
≥With DVD-RAM, you can, and the audio recorded also changes. Just press [AUDIO].
≥With DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW you cannot. Change
before recording with “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in the Setup menu.
27
64
Can I switch to SAP during
recording?
RQTV0141
–
Cover
Can a DVD-Video that does
not have a region number be
played?
Recording
68
–
–
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the remedies indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, refer to the “Customer Services Directory” on page 77 if you reside in the U.S.A. In other areas, consult your dealer.
The following do not indicate a problem with the unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sound.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric condition.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Periodic interruptions to reception due to satellite broadcasting breaks.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to the activation of one of its safety devices. (Press and hold [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)
Power
Page
No power
≥Insert the AC power supply cord securely into a known active AC outlet.
14
The unit switches to the
standby mode.
≥This is a power saving feature. Change “Off Timer” in the “Setup” menu, if you would prefer.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit to turn the unit
on.
63
–
Displays
Page
The display is dim.
≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.
“12:00A” is flashing on the
unit’s display.
≥Set the clock.
The recording time display,
the transfer (copying)
process display and the
displayed recording time of
MP3 are different from the
actual time.
≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
≥In DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL the remaining capacity does not increase even if titles are
deleted.
≥Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when the last
recorded title is deleted. (The recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.)
≥If you repeat recording or editing about 200 times or more, the remaining capacity of the DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL is reduced and then recording or editing may be disabled. (For the second
layer on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after about 60 times.)
≥The time during fast forward and rewind, or the process during transfer (copy) may not be displayed
accurately.
Compared to the actual
recorded time, the elapsed
time displayed is less.
Operation
65
19, 22
–
–
–
–
–
≥
Page
69
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 70 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Troubleshooting guide
Picture
Page
TV reception worsens after
connecting the unit.
≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment. It can
be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers.
–
The images from the unit do
not appear on the TV.
≥Make sure that the TV is connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal, S VIDEO OUT terminal,
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI AV OUT terminal on the unit.
≥Make sure that the TV’s input setting (e.g., VIDEO 1) is correct.
≥The TV isn’t compatible with progressive signals. Press and hold [∫] and [“ DVD] on the main unit at
the same time for about 5 seconds. The setting will change to interlace.
≥When connecting with a component video cable to a television that is incompatible with progressive
video, check if there is also an HDMI cable connected to an amplifier, etc. If so, turn the power off to
the device connected with an HDMI cable, and set the “HDMI Video Output” to “Off” in the Setup
menu.
≥To output video from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “HDMI Video Output” to “On” in the
Setup menu.
≥Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
14–17
Picture is distorted.
–
–
≥Select “Automatic” in “Status Messages” in the Setup menu.
65
The blue background does
not appear.
≥Select “On” in “Blue Background” in the Setup menu.
65
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.
≥Use the TV to change the aspect. If your TV does not have that function, set “Progressive” in the
Video menu to “Off”.
≥If you connect an HDMI cable, set “HDMI Output Display Aspect” in the Setup menu to “Normal”.
≥Check the settings for “TV Type”, “4:3 TV Settings for DVD-Video”, or “4:3 TV Settings for DVDRAM” in the Setup menu.
40
There is a lot of after-image
when playing video.
≥Set “DNR” in the Video menu to “Off”.
40
When playing DVD-Video
using progressive output,
one part of the picture
momentarily appears to be
doubled up.
≥Set “Progressive” in the Video menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method or
material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
≥When you use the HDMI AV OUT terminal for video output, follow the steps below for setting.
(1) Connect this unit to the TV with any cable except the HDMI cable
(2) Set “HDMI Video Output” in the Setup menu to “Off”
40
There is no apparent change ≥The effect cannot be seen with certain types of video.
in picture quality when
adjusted with the Video menu
in the on-screen menus.
Sound
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired
audio type.
Cannot switch audio.
RQTV0141
–
Status messages do not
appear.
Screen size is wrong.
70
–
–
65
65
–
65
–
Page
≥Check the connections and “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the amplifier if
you have connected one.
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Set “V. Surround Sound” in the Audio menu to “Off” in the following cases.
- When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
- When playing MTS broadcast titles.
≥This unit cannot playback multi-channel discs that prevent down-mixing unless the unit is connected
with a HDMI cable to an amplifier supporting CPPM and the HDMI standard version 1.1. Refer to the
disc jacket for more information. [DVD-A]
≥The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal
or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
≥Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
≥When the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (Optical) terminal is used for audio output and the unit is connected
to the television with a HDMI cable, set "HDMI Audio Output" to “Off” in the setup menu.
≥If the sound is distorted when the unit is connected to an amplifier with the HDMI cable, adjust the
settings in “HDMI Connection Speakers Setting” in the Setup menu to match the connection.
≥Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected with a
HDMI cable.
16, 64
≥You cannot change the audio type when a DVD-R, a DVD-R DL, a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), a
+R, a +R DL or a +RW is in the disc tray.
≥You cannot change the audio type when playing a DVD-R, a DVD-R DL, a DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), a +R, a +R DL or a +RW. (You can select “Main” or “Secondary Audio Program (SAP)” in
“Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in the Setup menu before recording.)
≥You have used a digital connection. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using audio cables
(analog connection).
≥There are discs whose audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.
–
27, 33
40
–
–
–
65
65
–
64
16, 64
–
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Recording, Scheduled recording, Transfer (Copying), External input
Cannot record.
Scheduled recording does
not work properly.
≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can
record onto.
≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to “PROTECT” or the disc is protected with “DVD
Management”.
≥Some programs have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).
≥The disc is full or nearly full. Delete unneeded titles or use another disc.
≥You cannot record on finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format) discs.
≥If you repeatedly insert discs or turn the unit on and off about 50 times or more, the recording or
editing of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW may be disabled.
≥A DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW recorded on the unit may not
be recordable on other Panasonic DVD recorders.
≥The material you are trying to record is copy-protected.
≥Scheduled recording will not be activated when in editing or transfer (copy). Scheduled recording will
begin after the editing/transfer (copy) is finished.
≥The scheduled recording program is incorrect or different scheduled recording times overlap.
Correct the program.
≥The clock is not correct. Set the clock.
≥Scheduled recording will not be activated during formatting, transfer (copying) and other such
operations which should not be interrupted when they are being carried out.
Page
6
61
60
6, 76
41, 59
61
–
–
–
–
31
19, 22
–
Scheduled recording does
not stop even when
[∫, STOP] is pressed.
≥If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”, you
cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
63
The scheduled recording
program remains even after
recording finishes.
≥The scheduled recording program remains if set to daily or weekly.
31
A part or whole of a recorded ≥If the power shuts down or the plug is disconnected from the household AC outlet while recording or
title has been lost.
editing, the program may be lost or the disc may become unusable. We cannot offer any guarantee
regarding lost titles or discs. You will have to format the disc ([RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc.
–
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to “PROTECT” or the disc is protected with “DVD
Management”.
≥Some video tapes on the market (including rental videos) are copy-protected to prevent illegal
reproductions. Copy-protected video tapes cannot be properly recorded.
≥You cannot use the transfer (copying) function when the FUNCTIONS window, the Scheduled
Recording List screen, etc. are displayed.
60
≥A video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted. Use a video cassette with
an accidental erasure prevention tab.
≥Some DVDs on the market (including rental DVD) are copy-protected to prevent illegal
reproductions. Copy-protected DVDs cannot be properly recorded.
≥You cannot use the transfer (copying) function when the FUNCTIONS window, the Scheduled
Recording List screen, etc. are displayed.
11
The sound level after editing ≥The sound level on DVD and VHS may not match depending on the disc. When the sound level in a
is not equal on DVD and on
particular part of the sound source is soft or loud, the sound may be recorded loudly or softly on a
VHS.
video tape.
–
Stripe-shaped black noise is
recorded.
≥The device in playback is interfering with the TV because the device is too close to the TV. Move the
device away from the TV.
–
Cannot record video or
sound from the external
device.
≥The external device is not correctly connected.
≥The proper external input channel (IN1, IN2 or DV) is not selected.
57
57
The DV automatic recording
function does not work.
≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV
equipment settings.
≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV equipment are
not successive.
≥Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.
≥You can only record audio/video images on a DV tape.
57
Cannot transfer (copy) VHS
to DVD.
Cannot transfer (copy) DVD
to VHS.
Troubleshooting guide
M6VP&PC.book 71 ページ
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
71
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 72 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Troubleshooting guide
Play
Play fails to start even when
[1, PLAY] is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
Page
≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or a disc that is unplayable on the unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalized on the equipment used for recording.
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8H) mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that
are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6H) mode.
≥You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
Audio and video momentarily ≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
pause.
≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
DVD-Video is not played.
≥Some DVD-Video cannot be played when you change the ratings level.
Alternative sound track and ≥Multiple languages are not recorded on the disc.
subtitles cannot be selected. ≥You may have to use the disc’s own menus to select languages.
–
32
63
–
32
≥When progressive output is on, closed captions cannot be displayed.
≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
≥Set “Subtitle” in the Disc menu to “On”.
–
–
39
Angle cannot be changed.
≥This function depends on software availability. Angles can only be changed during scenes where
different angles are recorded.
–
You have forgotten your
ratings password.
≥With the tray open, keep pressing [¥, REC] and [1] on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 or
more seconds.
–
Quick View does not work.
≥This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
≥This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
–
–
The resume play function
does not work.
≥Memorized positions are canceled when the unit is turned off or when the tray is opened. The
memorized position on the playlist is also canceled when the playlist and title are edited.
–
Page
Cannot format.
≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥You tried formatting a disc that is not compatible with the unit.
10
7
Cannot create chapters.
≥The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the disc.
The information is not written if there is an interruption in the power before this.
≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a start
point.
–
Cannot mark the start point
or the end point during
“Shorten Title” operation.
RQTV0141
–
No subtitles.
Edit
72
24
10
7
–
64
–
–
Cannot delete chapters.
≥When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.
43
The available recording time
doesn’t increase even after
deleting recordings on the
disc.
≥Available recording space on the DVD-R, the DVD-R DL, the +R or the +R DL does not increase
even after deleting previously recorded titles.
≥Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when the last
recorded title is deleted. (The recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.)
–
Cannot create a playlist.
≥You cannot select all the chapters in a title at once as the source of playlist edition if the title also
includes still pictures. Select them individually.
–
–
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Still pictures
Page
≥This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.
–
Cannot edit or format a card. ≥Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message
sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)
60
Cannot display Direct
Navigator screen.
The contents of the card
cannot be read.
≥The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.)
Format using FAT 12 or FAT 16 with other equipment or format the card with this unit.
≥The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this unit.
≥Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
≥SD memory cards from 8 MB to 2 GB can be used with this unit.
8, 36,
60
8
–
–
Copying, deleting and setting ≥When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.
protection takes a long time. ≥When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or card.
–
60
Scheduled recording began ≥If it comes to the time scheduled for recording, the recording may start even though you are editing.
in the middle of editing a still
picture.
–
VHS Picture
Page
OSD messages do not
appear.
≥Go to Setup and select “Automatic” in “Status Messages”.
Press [STATUS] to show the on-screen messages constantly.
The blue back appears
during play.
≥You are playing a blank or poor quality part of the tape.
≥You can damage the unit if you play dirty or damaged tapes and this can cause the blue back to
appear. Consult your dealer.
VHS Sound
Cannot hear the desired
audio type.
38, 65
–
–
Page
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
There is noise when playing a ≥Adjust the tracking.
video tape.
≥The tape is old or damaged.
VHS Play
Cannot play.
Troubleshooting guide
M6VP&PC.book 73 ページ
33
38
–
Page
≥Tapes recorded under a TV system other than NTSC (PAL, SECAM, etc.) cannot be played.
The playback screen flickers. ≥The video head is dirty.
≥The tape is too old or damaged.
VHS Recording, scheduled recording
–
–
–
Page
“1” flashes when I try to
start recording.
Cannot record.
≥A video cassette is not inserted. Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
≥The erasure prevention tab has been removed. Cover the hole with adhesive tape.
24
11
Cannot record TV program.
≥The desired channel is not selected. Select the desired TV program.
–
73
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 74 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Product Service
1. Damage requiring service — The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel if:
(a)The AC power supply cord or AC adaptor has been damaged; or
(b)Objects or liquids have gotten into the unit; or
(c)The unit has been exposed to rain; or
(d)The unit does not operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or
(e)The unit has been dropped or the cabinet damaged.
2. Servicing — Do not attempt to service the unit beyond that described in these operating instructions. Refer all other servicing to authorized
servicing personnel.
3. Replacement parts — When parts need replacing ensure the servicer uses parts specified by the manufacturer or parts that have the same
characteristics as the original parts. Unauthorized substitutes may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.
4. Safety check — After repairs or service, ask the servicer to perform safety checks to confirm that the unit is in proper working condition.
Product information
For product information or assistance with product operation:
Refer to “Customer Services Directory” on page (l 77).
The model number and serial number of this product can be
found on either the back or the bottom of the unit.
Please note them in the space provided below and keep for
future reference.
MODEL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
74
RQTV0141
User memo:
DATE OF PURCHASE
DEALER NAME
DEALER ADDRESS
TELEPHONE NUMBER
M6VP&PC.book 75 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Standby mode: (Display ON)
(Display OFF)
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Approx. 29 W
Approx. 3.2 W
Approx. 3.0 W
Recordable discs:
DVD-RAM: Ver. 2.0
Ver. 2.1/3X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 1.0
Ver. 2.2/5X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 2.0
DVD-R:
for General Ver. 2.0
for General Ver. 2.0/4X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 1.0
for General Ver. 2.x/8X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 3.0
for General Ver. 2.x/16X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 6.0
for DL Ver. 3.0
for DL Ver. 3.x/4X-SPEED DVD-R for DL Revision 1.0
DVD-RW: Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.1/2X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 1.0
Ver. 1.2/4X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 2.0
+R:
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
for DL Ver. 1.0
+RW:
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2/4X-SPEED
Recording system:
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R:
DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-Video format
DVD-RW: DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Recording time:
Max. 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour
SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours
EP: Approx. 6 hours or 8 hours
Playable discs:
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R:
DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-Video format
DVD-RW: DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD
CD-R/CD-RW (CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, JPEG)
Optical pick-up:
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
LASER Specification:
Class 1 LASER Product
Wave Length:
780 nm (CDs)
662 nm (DVDs)
Laser Power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the
safety protection
Television system:
TV system:
NTSC system, 525 lines, 60 fields
Antenna reception input:
TV Channel:
VHF: 2 ch to 13 ch
UHF: 14 ch to 69 ch
CATV Channel: 5A & A-5 ch to EEE ch
Quick Start for Recording (Quick Start : ON)
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM°
° From the power off state, recording on DVD-RAM starts about 1 second
after first pressing the Power button and then sequentially pressing the
REC button (Quick Start Mode).
Video system:
Recording system: (for DVD)
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Input:
LINE (pin jack)k2
S connectork2
Output: (for DVD PRIORITY)
LINE (pin jack)k2
S connectork2
Component video output: (for DVD PRIORITY)
Y, PB, PRk1
(480i/480p)
Y:
C:
1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
0.286 Vp-p; 75 ≠
Y:
C:
1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
0.286 Vp-p; 75 ≠
Y:
PB:
PR:
1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
0.7 Vp-p; 75 ≠
0.7 Vp-p; 75 ≠
Audio system:
Recording system: (for DVD)
Dolby Digital (2 ch)
Linear PCM (XP mode 2 ch)
Analog Input:
LINE (pin jack)k2
Reference input: 309 mVrms
FS: 2 Vrms (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Input impedance: 22 k≠
Analog Output: (for DVD PRIORITY)
LINE (pin jack)k2
Reference output: 309 mVrms
FS: 2 Vrms (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Output impedance: 1 k≠
(Load impedance: 10 k≠)
Number of channels: (for DVD)
Recording: 2 channels
Playback: 2 channels
Number of track: (for VHS)
HiFi: 2 track
Normal: 1 track
Digital Output: (for DVD PRIORITY)
Digital audio optical output connectork1
(PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS)
Product Service/Specifications
Specifications (common to DMR-ES45V and DMR-ES46V)
VHS:
Recording format:
Heads:
VHS Video Cassette System Standard with FM audio
4 Helical Scan Heads for Video
2 Helical Scan Heads for FM audio
1 Fixed Head for Normal audio
Tape speed/Recording time:
SP: 33.35 mm/s, 120 min (with T-120 cassette)
EP: 11.12 mm/s, 360 min (with T-120 cassette)
FF/REW time:
FF/REW: Approx. 60 s (with T-120 cassette)
Jet REW: Approx. 43 s (with T-120 cassette)
HDMI Output:
19 pin typeAk1
HDMI Ver. 1.2a (EDID Ver. 1.3)
DV Input:
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 Pink1
SD Card Slot:
Still picture (JPEG, TIFF):
SD Memory Card Slot 1 pc
Compatible media: SD Memory Card°, MultiMediaCard
° includes miniSD™ Cards (A miniSD™ adaptor
needs to be inserted)
Format:
FAT12, FAT16
Image File Format: JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for
Camera File system), TIFF (Uncompressed
RGB chunky), DPOF Compatible
Sub sampling 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
Number of pixels:
Between 34k34 pixels and 6144k4096 pixels
Thawing time:
Approx. 3 sec (6M pixels, JPEG)
Regional Code:
#1
Clock unit:
Quartz-controlled 12-hour digital display
Operating temperature range:
5 oC t o 40 oC (41 oF t o 104 oF )
Operating humidity range:
10% t o 80% RH (no condensation)
Dimensions:
Approx. 430 mm (W)k84 mm (H)k343 mm (D)
[Approx. 1615/16q (W)k35/16q (H)k137/8q (D)]
Mass:
Approx. 5.4 kg (Approx. 11.9 lbs)
Note
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mass and dimensions shown are approximate.
≥Useable capacity will be less (SD Memory Card).
75
RQTV0141
Glossary
Bitstream
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
This is a signal compressed and converted into digital form. It is
converted back to a multi-channel audio signal, e.g., 5.1-channel, by
a decoder.
HDMI is a next-generation digital interface for consumer electronic
products. Unlike conventional connections, it transmits
uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This
unit supports high-definition video output (720p, 1080i) from HDMI
AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high definition
compatible television is required.
CPPM (Content Protection for Prerecorded Media)
A copy protection system used for DVD-Audio files. This unit
supports CPPM.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your TV’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing. If this is the case, this
unit can only output the front two channels.
Tracks that do not allow down-mixing will not play correctly on this
unit except when connecting with an HDMI cable to an amplifier that
meets HDMI Ver. 1.1 standards and is CPPM compatible.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding color still pictures. If
you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the
data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one-tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality. You can play MP3s you have recorded onto CD-R and
CD-RW.
Pan & Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they will
be viewed on a widescreen TV (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often
don’t fit regular TVs (4:3 aspect ratio). 2 styles of picture,
“Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan:
The sides are cut off so the picture fills the screen.
Letterbox:
Black bands appear at the top and bottom of the
picture so the picture itself appears in an aspect
ratio of 16:9.
DPOF is the standard printing format for still picture data taken by a
digital camera, etc. It is used for automatic printing at a photo
developing store or on your home printer.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression
means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds.
This means you can hear dialog clearly at low volume.
Film and Video
Playback control (PBC)
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. The unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
≥Film is 24 or 30 frames per second, with motion picture film
generally being 24 frames per second.
≥Video is 60 fields per second (2 fields making up 1 frame).
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus displayed on the screen.
(The unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Finalize
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,
etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can
finalize DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on the unit. After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit. However, finalized DVD-RW can
be formatted to become recordable.
Folder
This is a place on the memory card where groups of data are stored
together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where still
pictures (JPEG, TIFF) are stored.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM and DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video
format) or +RW and SD memory card on this unit.
Formatting irrevocably erases all contents.
Frame refers to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your TV. Each frame consists of 2 fields.
Frame
Field
=
Field
+
≥A frame still shows 2 fields, so there may be some blurring
between them, but picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
RQTV0141
NTSC, the video signal standard, has 480 interlaced (i) scan lines,
whereas progressive scanning uses twice the number of scan lines.
This is called 480p.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your TV must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Protection
You can prevent accidental erasure by setting writing protection or
erasure protection.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
TIFF (Tag Image File Format)
Frame and field
76
Progressive/Interlace
This is a system used for compressing/decoding color still pictures, a
common format for storing high quality images on digital cameras
and other devices.
M6VP&PC.book 77 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company,
Division of Panasonic Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
Glossary/Limited Warranty
Limited Warranty
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5
San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985
Panasonic DVD Recorder
Limited Warranty
Limited Warranty Coverage
If your product does not work properly because of a defect in materials or workmanship,
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company or Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc. (collectively
referred to as “the warrantor”) will, for the length of the period indicated on the chart below,
which starts with the date of original purchase (“warranty period”), at its option either (a)
repair your product with new or refurbished parts, or (b) replace it with a new or a
refurbished product. The decision to repair or replace will be made by the warrantor.
Parts
Labor
DVD Recorder
Product or Part Name
One (1) Year
One (1) Year
Rechargeable Batteries,
DVD-RAM Disc (in
exchange for defective item)
Ten (10) Days
Not Applicable
During the “Labor” warranty period there will be no charge for labor. During the “Parts”
warranty period, there will be no charge for parts. You must carry-in or mail-in your product
during the warranty period. If non-rechargeable batteries are included, they are not
warranted. This warranty only applies to products purchased and serviced in the United
States or Puerto Rico. This warranty is extended only to the original purchaser of a new
product which was not sold “as is”. A purchase receipt or other proof of the original
purchase date is required for warranty service.
Carry-In or Mail-In Service
For Carry-In or Mail-In Service in the United States call 1-800-211-PANA (7262) or visit
Panasonic Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com
For assistance in Puerto Rico call Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc. (787)-750-4300 or fax
(787)-768-2910.
Limited Warranty Limits And Exclusions
This warranty ONLY COVERS failures due to defects in materials or workmanship, and
DOES NOT COVER normal wear and tear or cosmetic damage. The warranty ALSO DOES
NOT COVER damages which occurred in shipment, or failures which are caused by
products not supplied by the warrantor, or failures which result from accidents, misuse,
abuse, neglect, mishandling, misapplication, alteration, faulty installation, set-up
adjustments, misadjustment of consumer controls, improper maintenance, power line
surge, lightning damage, modification, or commercial use (such as in a hotel, office,
restaurant, or other business), rental use of the product, service by anyone other than a
Factory Servicenter or other Authorized Servicer, or damage that is attributable to acts of
God.
THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS LISTED UNDER
“LIMITED WARRANTY COVERAGE”. THE WARRANTOR IS NOT LIABLE
FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF
THIS WARRANTY. (As examples, this excludes damages for lost time, travel
to and from the servicer, loss of media or images, data or other recorded
content. The items listed are not exclusive, but are for illustration only.) ALL
EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY, ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THE LIMITED
WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts,
so the exclusions may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state. If a problem with this product develops
during or after the warranty period, you may contact your dealer or
Servicenter. If the problem is not handled to your satisfaction, then write to the
warrantor’s Consumer Affairs Department at the addresses listed for the
warrantor.
PARTS AND SERVICE WHICH ARE NOT COVERED BY THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY ARE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
Customer Services Directory
Obtain Product Information and Operating Assistance; locate your nearest Dealer or Servicenter; purchase Parts and
Accessories; or make Customer Service and Literature requests by visiting our Web Site at:
http://www.panasonic.com/consumersupport
or, contact us via the web at:
http://www.panasonic.com/contactinfo
You may also contact us directly at:
1-800-211-PANA (7262),
Monday-Friday 9 am-9 pm; Saturday-Sunday 10 am-7 pm, EST.
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY : 1-877-833-8855
Accessory Purchases
Purchase Parts, Accessories and Instruction Books online for all Panasonic Products by visiting our Web Site at:
http://www.pasc.panasonic.com
or, send your request by E-mail to:
npcparts@us.panasonic.com
You may also contact us directly at:
1-800-332-5368 (Phone) 1-800-237-9080 (Fax Only) (Monday – Friday 9 am to 8 pm, EST.)
Panasonic Services Company
20421 84th Avenue South, Kent, WA 98032
(We Accept Visa, MasterCard, Discover Card, American Express, and Personal Checks)
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY : 1-866-605-1277
Service in Puerto Rico
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5, San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985
Phone (787)750-4300, Fax (787)768-2910
F1003
77
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 78 ページ
２００６年２月６日
MEMO
78
RQTV0141
月曜日
午後３時２９分
M6VP&PC.book 79 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
≥Antes de hacer la conexión, apague todos los equipos y lea los
manuales de instrucciones apropiados.
≥El equipo periférico y los cables opcionales se venden por
separado a menos que se indique lo contrario.
Para su referencia
≥Las conexiones del equipo descritas son ejemplos.
≥El equipo periférico y los cables opcionales se venden por
separado a menos que se indique lo contrario.
∫ No conecte la unidad mediante una videograbadora
Los sistemas de protección de los derechos de autor afectarán las
señales de video enviadas mediante una videograbadora y la
imagen no se mostrará bien en el televisor.
Televisor
Televisor
La unidad
Videograbadora
Videograbadora
La unidad
∫ Cuando la unidad no vaya a utilizarse durante mucho
tiempo
Para ahorrar energía, desenchufe la unidad de la toma de CA. Esta
unidad consume una pequeña cantidad de energía aunque se
encuentre apagada (8 W aproximadamente).
MEMO/Instalación básica
Instalación básica
Conexión con un televisor
∫ Conexión (con cable de audio/vídeo)
Conecte por orden numérico de 1 a 4.
∫ Conexión (sin cable de audio/vídeo)
No necesita conectar “3”.
≥Después de esta conexión, ajuste el canal de salida RF “OFF”
(l 80), y luego pulse el botón TV/VIDEO del mando a distancia
del televisor para seleccionar el modo de entrada AV al terminal
del televisor conectado. Puede mirar un vídeo desde esta unidad
en su televisor.
La unidad envía una señal al televisor a través de un cable coaxial
de 75 ≠ en el canal 3 o 4. Es posible ver una imagen de vídeo en su
televisor de la misma manera que la que ve en las emisiones
televisivas.
≥Después de esta conexión, ajuste el canal de salida RF “CH3” o
“CH4” (l 80).
Televisión
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
Cable de pared o
señal de antena
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Rojo Blanco Amarillo
Cable de audio/vídeo
(incluido)
Panel trasero de esta unidad
3
2
75 h
cable
coaxial
(incluido)
75 h
cable
coaxial
1
Rojo Blanco Amarillo
A la toma doméstica
de CA
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
A la
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
Y
PB
PR
RF
IN
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
A la RF IN
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
AC IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
RF
OUT
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VHF/UHF
A la RF OUT
Cable de alimentación de CA (Incluido)
Conecte solamente después de haber finalizado todas las demás conexiones.
4
Salida DVD y salida DVD/VHS
La unidad tiene terminales de salida DVD/VHS COMMON y los de
salida DVD PRIORITY.
Salida DVD/VHS COMMON
Para gozar de una más alta calidad de
la imagen
∫ Conexión al terminal S VIDEO IN
Terminal S VIDEO OUT
Y
PB
PR
Los terminales S VIDEO OUT logran una imagen más viva que la del
terminal VIDEO OUT. (El resultado real depende del televisor.)
Tras terminar “Conexión con un televisor”, conecte el cable S VIDEO.
De costumbre puede ver una imagen desde el terminal INPUT2.
Cuando quiere reproducir un VHS mientras graba en DVD, cambie al
terminal INPUT1.
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
v
R-AUDIO-L
DVD OUT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
R-AUD
Salida DVD PRIORITY
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
≥Para los terminales de salida DVD/VHS COMMON, pueden
lograrse sea las señales DVD sea las VHS.
DVD PRIORITY OUT
≥Salvo mientras que graba o va haciendo una grabación
programada, con el terminal de salida DVD PRIORITY puede
también reproducir una cinta en el DVD.
∫ Conexión a los terminales COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Terminal COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Estos terminales pueden usarse para el entrelazado o la salida
progresiva y proporcionan una imagen más clara que la del terminal
S VIDEO OUT.
Tras terminar “Conexión con un televisor”, conecte el cable
COMPONENT VIDEO.
De costumbre puede ver una imagen desde el terminal
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT. Cuando quiere reproducir un VHS
mientras graba en DVD, cambie al terminal INPUT1.
≥Conecte a los terminales del mismo color.
79
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 80 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Instalación básica
[6] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar “Sintonizador” o
“Entrada” y pulse [ENTER].
DVD/VHS
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
Botones
numéricos
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
CH
CH, W, X
[7] Pulse [ENTER] para iniciar la sintonización
automática por Plug-in.
≥La unidad procede con el ajuste automático del reloj. La hora
aparece cuando esté terminado dicho ajuste.
ADD/DLT
CH
∫ Cuando aparece la pantalla “No se ha encontrado
ningún canal” o la de “Ajus. automát. del reloj no
acabado”
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
SKIP/INDEX
∫
Cuando no ajusta los canales en esta unidad, seleccione
“Entrada”. La unidad entonces muestra la pantalla “Ajuste
manual del reloj”.
Ajuste manualmente el reloj.
POWER
Í
STOP
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
Después de apagar la unidad, confirme lo siguiente y vuelva a
configurar.
≥Compruebe si el cable de antena está firmemente conectado al
terminal RF IN.
≥Si no ajusta los canales en esta unidad, seleccione “Entrada”
en el paso 6.
Pantalla “Ajus. automát. del reloj no acabado.”
Pulse [ENTER] y ajuste manualmente el reloj.
FF
PLAY
;
CM SKIP
REC MODE
µ
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
CREATE
RETURN
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
Preparación
≥Encienda el televisor y seleccione la entrada de vídeo apropiada a
las conexiones de la unidad (Ejemplo: entrada AV, CH3 o CH4).
≥Si conecta la unidad a través de una caja para televisor de cable o
un receptor de satélite, sintonice su PBS local para que funcione el
ajuste automático del reloj.
Si no hay ningún PBS local, ajuste el reloj manualmente.
Conexión
(sin cable de audio/vídeo):
Seleccione “CH3” o “CH4” que
visualiza la pantalla a la derecha.
Conexión
(con cable de audio/vídeo):
Seleccione “OFF”
Select Language
Seleccione el idioma
Sélection de langue
English
Español
Français
Usted no tiene que cambiar el ajuste cuando está conectado a un
televisor de aspecto estándar de 4:3 que no sea compatible con la
salida progresiva.
[1]
Durante la parada
Pulse [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Seleccione “Otras funciones” con [3, 4] y
pulse [ENTER].
[3] Seleccione “CONFIGURACIÓN” con [3, 4] y
pulse [ENTER].
[4] Seleccione “Pantalla TV” con [3, 4] y pulse
[2, 1].
[5] Seleccione “Tipo TV” [3, 4] y pulse [ENTER].
≥Aspecto 4:3/Aspecto 16:9:
4:3
16:9
El visualizador de la unidad
[3] Utilice [3, 4] para seleccionar el idioma y pulse
[ENTER].
[4] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar “TV de 4:3” o “TV
ancho de 16:9” y pulse [ENTER].
[5] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar “Encendido” o
“Apagado” y pulse [ENTER].
Si activa la función “Accionamiento rápido”, seleccione
“Encendido”.
RQTV0141
Seleccionar el tipo de televisor
Press ENTER
Pulse ENTER
Appuyer sur ENTER
El visualizador de la unidad
Cada vez que pulsa el botón:
CH 3 (Ajustes predeterminados) ,-. CH4 ,-. OFF
^-------------------------------------------------------------------J
80
∫ Si el reloj tiene una hora en adelante o retrasada con
respecto a la hora real
Seleccione “j1” o “i1” en “Ajustar del huso horario” en el menú
CONFIGURACIÓN.
Sintonización automática por Plug-in
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER].
[2] Pulse [CH, W, X] para
seleccionar un número
de canal de salida RF.
[8] Pulse [ENTER].
Acerca de la función “Accionamiento rápido”
Si ajusta Accionamiento rápido en activado, puede iniciar a
grabar al DVD-RAM alrededor de 1 segundo después de que
haya pulsado [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la
unidad.
Cuando haya seleccionado “Encendido”, tiene lugar lo
siguiente.
≥El consumo de energía en espera aumenta por el hecho de
que se suministra energía a los mandos de la unidad.
Aspecto estándar de 4:3
Televisor de aspecto panorámico 16:9
≥480p/480i:
Seleccione “480p” si el televisor es compatible con la salida
progresiva.
[6] Utilice [3, 4] para seleccionar el elemento y
pulse [ENTER].
∫ Para volver a la pantalla anterior
Pulse [RETURN].
∫ Para salir de la pantalla
Pulse [RETURN].
M6VP&PC.book 81 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Insertar discos
Procedimientos de grabación
[1] Pulse [<, OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal
para abrir la bandeja.
≥Puede insertar un disco de cartucho o sin cartucho.
[2] Pulse [<, OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal
para cerrar la bandeja.
≥Si inserta un DVD-RAM con la lengüeta de protección contra
la escritura ajustada en “PROTECT”, la reproducción inicia
automáticamente.
Nota
≥Un disco de doble cara tiene que colocarse con la cara que quiere
grabar/reproducir mirando hacia abajo.
≥No es posible grabar continuamente desde una cara a la otra en
un disco de dos caras. Tendrá que expulsar el disco y darlo la
vuelta.
≥Cuando utilice un DVD-RAM de 8 cm (3q) o un DVD-R de 8 cm
(3q), quite el disco del cartucho.
Disco sin cartucho
Disco en cartucho
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Insértelo con la cara impresa hacia arriba.
(2) Inserte completamente hasta que haga un ruido seco.
(3) Insértelo con la etiqueta arriba y la flecha hacia adentro.
Insertar un videocasete
La superficie a través
de la que puede ver el
rollo de la cinta tiene
que estar de cara
hacia arriba,
Inserte un
videocasete.
≥La unidad se
enciende
automáticamente.
∫ Para expulsar un videocasete
≥Puede expulsar el videocasete aun cuando la unidad esté en el
modo de espera. Ésta vuelve a la espera una vez que lo haya
expulsado.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
≥Puede grabar hasta 99 títulos en un disco.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Puede grabar hasta 49 títulos en un disco.
≥No es posible grabar emisiones digitales que permiten “Grabación
sólo una vez” en el DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL,
+RW o discos DVD-RAM de 8 cm (3q). Utilice un CPRM
compatible DVD-RAM
≥La grabación se hará en el espacio vacío del disco. Los datos no
se escribirán encima de otros.
≥Si ya no queda espacio en el disco de grabación, será menester
borrar los títulos innecesarios o utilizar un nuevo disco.
Cuando graba en un DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (Formato
DVD-Vídeo), +R, +R DL o +RW
≥Cuando graba emisiones MTS
- Si no conecta una caja para televisor de cable
Seleccione “Main” o “SAP” en “Seleccionar MTS” en el menú
CONFIGURACIÓN.
- Si conecta una caja para televisor de cable
Seleccione “Main” o “SAP” en el TV box de cable.
≥La relación de aspecto de la imagen grabada será 4:3.
≥A fin de reproducir DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (Formato
Vídeo DVD) +R, +R DL grabado usando esta unidad en otra
fuente de reproducción, antes tiene que finalizar el disco.
Preparación
≥Cancele la protección. [RAM]
≥Seleccione la unidad que ve el canal (por ejemplo la entrada AV)
en el televisor.
≥Seleccione un tipo de audio que quiere grabar. (l 82)
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la
unidad.
[2] Pulse [DRIVE SELECT] para seleccionar la
unidad en la que quiere grabar (DVD o VHS).
[3] Inserte un disco.
≥Cuando usa un DVD-RAM por la primera vez con esta unidad,
formatéelo para garantizar una esmerada grabación.
o
Inserte un videocasete que tenga intacta la
lengüeta de protección contra el borrado
accidental.
[4] Pulse [CH, W, X] para seleccionar el canal.
≥Para seleccionar con los botones numéricos:
Modo de antena (Ondas
hertzianas)
Ej.,
“5”:
[0] )[5]
“15”:
[1] )[5]
Para la unidad principal
≥Pulse [<, EJECT] en la unidad principal.
Para el mando a distancia
Pulse [DRIVE SELECT] para seleccionar el lado VHS y luego pulse
y mantenga pulsado [∫, STOP] durante 3 segundos o más.
Sólo la principal o SAP pueden grabarse para las emisiones
MTS, cuando graba al DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL,
+RW
Si no conecta una caja de cable
Seleccione “Main” o “SAP” en “Seleccionar MTS” del menú
CONFIGURACIÓN.
Si conecta una caja de cable
Seleccione “Main” o “SAP” en la caja de cable.
Modo televisor de cable
(Cable)
Ej., “5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
“115”: [1] )[1] )[5]
[5] Pulse [REC MODE] para seleccionar el modo de
grabación.
Antes de grabar
≥[+RW] El menú del título creado se borra cuando graba en el disco.
Vuelva a crear el menú del título usando “Crear menú superior
DVD.” en Gestión del DVD.
Instalación básica/Grabación de programas de televisión
Grabación de programas de televisión
[6]
[DVD]: XP, SP, LP o EP
[VHS]: SP, EP o VP
Pulse [¥, REC] para empezar a grabar.
≥Durante la grabación no se puede cambiar el canal ni el modo de
grabación. Puede cambiarlos mientras que la grabación está en
pausa, pero el material se graba como un título distinto.
∫ Para hacer una pausa en la grabación
Pulse [;, PAUSE]. (Pulse de nuevo para reiniciar la grabación.)
≥El título no se divide en títulos distintos. [DVD]
≥También puede pulsar [¥, REC] para reiniciar la grabación.
∫ Para detener la grabación
Pulse [∫, STOP].
≥Grabado como 1 título hasta el punto donde termina. [DVD]
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
La unidad tarda unos 30 segundos en completar la información
para administrar la grabación después de terminar esta última.
81
RQTV0141
Grabación de programas de televisión
∫ Modos de grabación (VHS)
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
∫
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
CH, W, X
VOLUME
TV/VIDEO
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
STOP
PAUSE
modo VP:
FF
1
PLAY
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
µ
AUDIO
A
REC
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
VCR/TV
F Rec
STATUS
F Rec
∫ Modos de grabación y tiempos de
grabación aproximados (DVD)
Dependiendo del contenido que está siendo grabado, los tiempos
de grabación pueden ser inferiores a los indicados.
DVD-RAM
1
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R, +RW
(4,7 GB)
Un solo lado
(4,7 GB)
Dos lados°
(9,4 GB)
XP (Alta calidad)
1 hora
2 horas
1 hora
SP (Normal)
2 horas
4 horas
2 horas
LP (Larga duración)
4 horas
8 horas
4 horas
EP
(Duración extralarga)
8 horas
(6 horas°2)
16 horas
(12 horas°2)
8 horas
(6 horas°2)
FR
(Grabación flexible)
8 horas
máximo
8 horas máximo
para una cara
8 horas
máximo
3
DVD-R DL, +R DL° (8,5 GB)
Primera capa (L0)
XP (Alta calidad)
Segunda capa (L1)
55 minutos
50 minutos
SP (Normal)
1 hora 50 minutos
1 hora 40 minutos
LP (Larga duración)
3 horas 40 minutos
3 horas 20 minutos
7 horas 25 minutos
EP
(Duración extralarga) (5 horas 30 minutos°2)
6 horas 50 minutos
(5 horas 15 minutos°2)
7 horas 25 minutos
máximo
6 horas 50 minutos
máximo
FR
(Grabación flexible)
Esta unidad usa una grabación de velocidad variable de
transferencia de bits (VBR) que varía la cantidad de datos grabados
para adaptar las imágenes, así que los tiempos reales de grabación
mostrados por la unidad resultarán diferentes (la diferencia será
sobre todo evidente con el DVD-R DL y +R DL).
Para estar seguro, utilice un disco en el que queda bastante tiempo.
°1 No es posible grabar o reproducir continuamente desde una
cara a la otra en un disco de dos caras.
°2 Cuando “Tiempo de grab. en el mode EP” ha sido ajustado a
“EP - Repr. ón ampliada (6H)” en el menú CONFIGURACIÓN.
La calidad del sonido es mejor cuando usa “EP - Repr. ón
ampliada (6H)” que cuando usa “EP - Repr. ón ampliada (8H)”.
°3 No es posible grabar continuamente de la primera capa a la segunda.
Nota
Cuando grabe en un DVD-RAM utilizando el modo EP (8H), puede
que no sea posible reproducir ese disco en reproductores DVD
compatibles con DVD-RAM. En este caso, utilice el modo EP (6H).
82
RQTV0141
SP: Puede grabar lo largo mostrado en la cinta.
EP: 3 veces lo largo del modo SP.
VP: 5 veces lo largo del modo SP.
≥Para lograr una capacidad de grabación más larga, seleccione “EP” o “VP”.
≥Si la calidad de la imagen es importante para usted o por si desea
almacenar la cinta durante un largo período, seleccione “SP”.
≥La unidad puede reproducir cintas grabadas en el modo LP en
otro equipo (“LP” se enciende en el visualizador de la unidad).
CH
RESET
Modo de grabación
FR (modo de grabación flexible):
≥Puede ajustar el modo FR cuando transfiere (copia) o programa
grabaciones programadas.
≥Una cinta grabada por la unidad en el modo VP no puede
reproducirse por otras videograbadoras. Se recomienda que
se la distingue entre las demás cintas
escribiendo “VP” en su etiqueta, etc.
Cuando reproduce cintas grabadas con el modo VP, necesita más
tiempo para que funcione el alineamiento automático y, con unas
cintas, podría no funcionar en absoluto. Haga el alineamiento
manualmente si fuera éste el caso.
Nota
No puede reproducir una grabación VP en otro equipo.
∫ Cuando se visualiza la pantalla de
confirmación del formato
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Cuando inserta un disco nuevo y
uno grabado en un ordenador u
otro equipo, podría aparecer una
pantalla de confirmación del
formato. Formatee el disco para
usarlo. Sin embargo, todo el
contenido grabado se va a borrar.
Pulse [2, 1] para
seleccionar “Si” y pulse
[ENTER].
Formatear
Este disco no está formateado
correctamente.
Formatear el disco en Gestión DVD.
Si
No
ENTER
∫ Para formatear un disco
Son necesarios muchos pasos para formatear un disco.
∫ Cuando quita un disco grabado
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Cuando pulsa [<, OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal mientras
que va a parar:
Aparece la siguiente pantalla
Para reproducir en otros lectores DVD ( Finalizar )
cuando no haya procesado el disco
La finalización necesita para permitir reproducir
el disco en otros lectores DVD compatibles. Una ves
para reproducir en otro equipo.
finalizados, los titulos no pueden agregarse al
Cuando finaliza el disco
Pulse [¥, REC].
No puede detener este proceso una
vez que lo haya iniciado.
Pulse “REC” para iniciar
a finalizar.
Pulse OPEN/CLOSE para diferir la
final.ón. El disco só
Para especificar un tiempo para detener
la grabación
–Grabación de un toque
Mientras graba
Pulse [¥, REC] para seleccionar el tiempo de grabación.
≥En la unidad principal, pulse [¥, REC].
El visualizador de la unidad
Cada vez que pulsa el botón:
Contador (cancelar) # OFF 0:30 # OFF 1:00 # OFF 1:30
^------- OFF 4:00 ! OFF 3:00 ! OFF 2:00 !----------}
Seleccionar el audio para grabar
[RAM]
Pulse [AUDIO].
Estéreo # SAP # Mono
^----------------------------}
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Reproducir DVD mientras graba VHS
Puede reproducir discos mientras graba VHS. La grabación no
quedará afectada.
≥Reproducción DVD (l 84)
Para su referencia
≥No puede grabar en discos mientras graba VHS.
Grabación flexible
(Grabación que cabe en el espacio restante del
disco)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
La unidad computa una velocidad de grabación que permite
adaptarla a la hora establecida (dentro del tiempo que queda en el
disco) con la mejor calidad de la imagen.
Reproducir VHS mientras graba DVD
La utilización de “GRABACIÓN FLEX.” es conveniente en
este tipo de situaciones.
≥Cuando el espacio libre del disco haga que la selección del
modo de grabación apropiado sea más difícil
≥Cuando usted quiere grabar un programa largo con la mejor
calidad de imagen posible
Ej., grabación de un programa de 90 minutos en un disco
Si selecciona el modo XP, el programa no cabrá en un disco.
Puede reproducir cintas mientras graba DVD. La grabación no
quedará afectada.
≥Reproducción VHS (l 86)
Para su referencia
≥No puede grabar en cintas mientras graba DVD.
Ver el televisor mientras graba
Preparación
≥Conexión (sin cable de audio/vídeo)
- Asegúrese de que el indicador TV esté encendido en el
visualizador de la unidad. Por si no está encendido, pulse [VCR/
TV] para encenderlo.
≥Conexión (con cable de audio/vídeo)
- Pulse [TV/VIDEO] para cambiar el modo de entrada a “TV”.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
Para su referencia
≥Puede también hacerlo si la unidad está realizando una grabación
programada.
≥La grabación no queda afectada.
[RAM]
Preparación
≥Seleccione el lado DVD pulsando [DRIVE SELECT].
Es necesario un segundo disco para
30 minutos del programa.
Si selecciona el modo SP, el programa no cabrá en un disco.
Pulse [CH, W, X] del televisor para seleccionar el
canal TV deseado.
Reproducción mientras usted está
grabando
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
Grabación de programas de televisión
M6VP&PC.book 83 ページ
Sin embargo, quedarán unos 30 minutos
de espacio libre en el disco
Si selecciona “FLEXIBLE RECORDING”, el
programa cabrá perfectamente en un disco.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
Preparación
≥Seleccione el lado DVD pulsando [DRIVE SELECT].
≥Seleccione el canal para grabar.
[1]
Durante la parada
Pulse [F Rec].
Consejo
≥El sonido no se produce durante el avance rápido.
∫ Reproducción desde el comienzo del título
mientras está grabando–Reproducción de
persecución
Puede iniciar a reproducir desde el comienzo del título mientras que
sigue grabándolo.
Mientras hace una grabación normal o una programada
Pulse [1, PLAY].
≥La reproducción inicia mientras que procede la grabación.
Para su referencia
≥La reproducción no puede tener comienzo hasta que hayan
pasado al menos 2 segundos desde el inicio de la grabación.
∫ Reproducción de un título previamente
grabado mientras graba–Grabación y
reproducción simultáneas
Puede reproducir un título grabado anteriormente mientras que graba otro título.
[1]
Mientras hace una grabación normal o una programada
Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[2] Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar un título y
pulse [ENTER].
[2] Pulse [2, 1] para seleccionar “Hora” y “Min.” y
pulse [3, 4] para ajustar el tiempo de grabación.
[3]
≥También puede poner el tiempo de grabación con los
botones numéricos.
≥No puede grabar durante más de 8 horas.
Cuando quiere iniciar la grabación
Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar “Empezar” y
pulse [ENTER].
≥Empieza la grabación.
Para salir de la pantalla sin grabar
Pulse [RETURN].
Para detener la grabación al rato de empezar
Pulse [∫, STOP].
Para mostrar el tiempo restante
Pulse [STATUS].
Para su referencia
≥Durante una grabación flexible, en el visualizador de la unidad se
encienden todos los indicadores del modo de grabación.
≥No es posible cambiar el canal o el modo de grabación mientras
que la grabación flexible está en pausa.
≥ La reproducción inicia mientras que procede la grabación.
∫ Para salir de la pantalla DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Para su referencia
≥Durante la grabación y la reproducción simultáneas, no puede editar ni
borrar títulos con el Direct Navigator ni listas de reproducción.
≥Aunque inicie a reproducir mientras que la unidad está en espera
de la grabación programada, la grabación inicia al llegar la hora
establecida.
83
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 84 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Reproducir discos
∫ Cuando aparece una pantalla de menú en el
televisor
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
Í
DRIVE
SELECT
Botones
numéricos
:, 9
∫
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
STOP
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
TIME SLIP
FF
PLAY
CM SKIP
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
[VCD]
Pulse los botones numéricos para seleccionar un elemento.
Ej.:
“5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar un elemento y pulse
[ENTER].
≥Algunas veces puede usar los botones numéricos para
seleccionar un elemento.
VOLUME
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
6, 5
1
;
CM SKIP
3, 4, 2, 1
2;, ;1
ENTER
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
Preparación
≥Encienda el televisor y seleccione la apropiada entrada de
vídeo para adaptar las conexiones a la unidad.
≥Seleccione el lado DVD pulsando [DRIVE SELECT].
Reproducir discos
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la
unidad.
[2] Inserte un disco. (l 81)
[3] Pulse [1, PLAY].
≥La bandeja del disco se cierra e inicia la reproducción
(La unidad necesita algún tiempo para leer el disco antes de
iniciar la reproducción).
≥La reproducción empieza desde el título grabado más
recientemente.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
≥La reproducción empieza desde el comienzo del disco.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
∫ Para detener la reproducción
Pulse [∫, STOP].
La posición de detención se memoriza.
Función de reanudación de la reproducción
Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la reproducción desde esta posición.
≥[VCD] Según el disco, puede no ser eficaz la función de
reanudación de la reproducción.
≥El punto de detención se elimina cuando:
- Pulsa [∫, STOP] muchas veces.
- Abre la bandeja.
- [DVD-A] [VCD] [CD] Apaga la unidad.
≥Podría aparecer el salva-pantalla a la derecha
Salva-pantalla
cuando detiene la reproducción. Vuelva a pulsar
[∫, STOP] y usted puede usar el sintonizador de
la unidad para ver el televisor.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
∫ Para poner en pausa la reproducción
Pulse [;, PAUSE]. (Pulse de nuevo para reiniciar la reproducción.)
84
RQTV0141
Otros botones usados para obrar en los menús
Lea las instrucciones del disco para más detalles sobre el
funcionamiento.
Nota
≥ Si aparece “
operación.
” en el televisor, la unidad o el disco prohíben la
Seleccionar títulos grabados para
reproducir
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[1] Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[2] Utilice [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar el título que
quiere ver y pulse [ENTER].
≥Inicia la reproducción.
≥Puede también seleccionar títulos insertando un número de 2
cifras usando los botones numéricos.
Ej.:
“5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
≥Si inserta un número más grande que el número total de
títulos, se selecciona el último título.
∫ Para eliminar la lista de títulos
Pulse [RETURN].
Para su referencia
≥Iconos de la pantalla Direct Navigator
: Título protegido
: Protegido contra copia así que él no se pudo grabar.
t: No puede reproducir
¥: En grabación
: Título con restricción “grabación de una sola vez”
Quick View (Reproducción t1,3)
[RAM]
Puede ser aumentada la velocidad de reproducción sin distorsionar
el audio.
Durante la reproducción
Mantenga pulsado [1, PLAY].
DVD-RAM
Reproducir
DVD-RAM
Repr. x1.3
∫ Para volver a la reproducción normal
Pulse [1, PLAY].
Avance rápido y rebobinado —
BÚSQUEDA
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
Durante la reproducción
Pulse [6, SLOW/SEARCH]
SLOW/SEARCH].
Ej., [RAM]
o [5 ,
DVD-RAM
• • • •
t2
≥Hay 5 velocidades de búsqueda. Aumenta la
velocidad cada vez que se pulsa. ([+R] [+RW] hasta 3 velocidades)
≥Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la reproducción.
Para su referencia
≥El sonido sólo se produce al primer nivel de avance rápido. En el
caso de DVD Audio (salvo las porciones de imágenes en
movimiento), CD y MP3, él se produce en todos los niveles.
≥Dependiendo del disco puede que la búsqueda resulte imposible.
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Salto
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
Durante la reproducción o mientras está en pausa
Pulse [:, SKIP] o [9, SKIP].
≥Cada pulsación aumenta el número de saltos.
Reproducción de cámara lenta
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-A] (Partes de imagen móvil solamente) [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Durante la pausa
Pulse [6, SLOW/SEARCH]
o [5, SLOW/
SEARCH].
≥Cuando la reproducción de cámara lenta continúa durante
5 minutos, ésta se detiene automáticamente (excluyendo [DVD-A]
[DVD-V] [VCD]).
≥Hay 5 velocidades de reproducción. Su velocidad aumenta a
medida que se pulse.
≥Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la reproducción.
≥[VCD] Dirección de avance ([5, SLOW/SEARCH]) solamente.
Vista de encuadre en encuadre
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-A] (Partes de imagen móvil solamente) [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Durante la pausa
Pulse [2;] ([2]) o [;1] ([1]).
≥A medida que se pulse se visualiza el encuadre siguiente o el
anterior.
≥Mantenga pulsado para cambiar en orden avance o retroceso.
≥Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la reproducción.
≥[VCD] Dirección de avance ([;1], [1]) solamente.
Reproducción directa
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
Puede reproducir desde el título, el capítulo o la pista que
selecciona.
Durante la reproducción
Pulse los botones numéricos para seleccionar un
elemento.
Ej.:
“5”:
“15”:
[0] )[5]
[1] )[5]
[CD] (disco MP3, JPEG y TIFF solamente)
“5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
Salto del tiempo especificado — Time
Slip
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[1] Pulse [TIME SLIP].
[2] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar el tiempo y pulse
[ENTER].
Reproducir discos
M6VP&PC.book 85 ページ
La reproducción salta al tiempo especificado.
≥Cada vez que pulsa [3, 4] el tiempo aumenta [3] o disminuye
[4] en intervalos de 1 minuto. (Mantenga pulsado para cambiar a
intervalos de 10 minutos.)
Cambio del audio durante la
reproducción
Pulse [AUDIO] para seleccionar el tipo de audio.
≥Según es el medio de grabación puede seleccionar el tipo de
audio.
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Estéreo# Mono L# Mono R
^--------------------------------------}
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [Cuando reproduce una emisión SAP grabada en un
DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (Formato de grabación de vídeo DVD)]
Principal () SAP
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Esto le permite cambiar los elementos como el número de canal de
audio y el idioma de la pista de sonido.
Pista de audio
1 ENG
Î Digital 3/2.1ch
Ej., es el inglés el idioma seleccionado. [DVD-V]
[VHS]
Estéreo > Mono L > Mono R > Sin visualización (pista de audio normal)
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------}
Nota
≥Si no puede cambiar el tipo de audio cuando para la conexión sólo
ha usado un cable óptico digital, ajuste “Dolby Digital” a “PCM”.
Alternativamente, puede conectar a un amplificador con un cable
de Audio/Vídeo y cambiar la entrada en el amplificador para
adaptar la conexión.
[DVD-A]
Puede especificarse un número de grupo mientras que está
visualizado el salva-pantalla (l 84).
Ej.:
“5”: [5]
≥Esto sólo funciona durante la parada con algunos discos (el salvapantalla se visualiza).
≥Reproducir grupos adicionales
En unos discos caben grupos adicionales. Si después de
seleccionar un grupo aparece una pantalla de contraseña, escriba
la contraseña con los botones numéricos y pulse [ENTER]. Por lo
que respecta a la contraseña, se remite a la funda del disco, etc.
Salto CM
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Puede saltar aproximadamente 1 minuto con una presión.
Durante la reproducción
Pulse [CM SKIP].
Crear capítulos
[RAM]
Durante la reproducción
Pulse [CREATE CHAPTER].
≥Pulse [:, SKIP] o [9, SKIP] para saltar al comienzo de un
capítulo.
≥No puede activar esta función cuando está ejecutando la
transferencia (copia).
85
RQTV0141
Reproducción de un videocasete
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la
unidad.
[2] Seleccione el lado VHS pulsando
[DRIVE SELECT].
[3] Seleccione la unidad que ve el canal (por
ejemplo la entrada AV) en el televisor.
[4] Inserte una videograbadora. (l 81)
[5] Pulse [1, PLAY].
≥La reproducción inicia automáticamente al insertar un
videocasete en el que se haya quitado la lengüeta.
∫ Para hacer una pausa en la reproducción
Pulse [;
86
RQTV0141
M6VP&PC.book 87 ページ
２００６年２月６日
月曜日
午後３時２９分
Angle ............................................................................................. 39
Antenna System........................................................................... 19
Audio
attributes ..................................................................................... 39
channel ....................................................................................... 39
language ..................................................................................... 64
playback...................................................................................... 33
receiving, recording..................................................................... 27
Auto Bilingual Choice.................................................................. 27
Auto SP/EP mode......................................................................... 31
Change Thumbnail................................................................ 42, 46
Channel
adding, deleting........................................................................... 19
audio ........................................................................................... 39
captions....................................................................................... 20
Set Channel Automatically.......................................................... 19
Chasing playback ........................................................................ 28
Cleaning
disc.............................................................................................. 10
lens ............................................................................................... 3
main unit ....................................................................................... 3
video heads................................................................................. 11
Clock Settings .............................................................................. 22
CM Skip......................................................................................... 33
Connection
amplifier, system component ...................................................... 16
antenna ....................................................................................... 15
antenna, television ...................................................................... 14
cable box, satellite receiver......................................................... 15
DV input terminal ........................................................................ 57
external device............................................................................ 57
Copy (playlist) .............................................................................. 45
CPRM system .......................................................................... 6, 76
Create chapters..................................................................... 33, 46
Create playlists ............................................................................ 44
Delete
album .......................................................................................... 48
all titles ........................................................................................ 60
chapter ........................................................................................ 43
chapter in playlist ........................................................................ 46
playlist ......................................................................................... 45
title .............................................................................................. 41
Dialog Enhancer........................................................................... 40
Direct Navigator ........................................................................... 32
Divide Title.................................................................................... 43
DNR ............................................................................................... 40
DPOF ...................................................................................... 48, 76
DV automatic recording .............................................................. 57
DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW, rR, rR DL, rRW........................................................ 6
Enter Name
album .......................................................................................... 48
disc.............................................................................................. 60
operation ..................................................................................... 58
playlist ......................................................................................... 45
title ....................................................................................... 30, 42
Finalize................................................................................... 61, 76
Flexible Recording....................................................................... 29
Format Disc .................................................................................. 61
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) .................................................... 26
FUNCTIONS window.................................................................... 40
GUI Transfer (Copying) ................................................... 51, 53, 55
HDMI.................................................................................. 17, 65, 76
HDAVI............................................................................................ 17
Intact erasure prevention tab...................................................... 11
Jet Rewind .................................................................................... 37
JPEG ................................................................................. 35, 36, 76
Language
audio ........................................................................................... 64
code list....................................................................................... 66
on-screen .................................................................................... 65
soundtrack .................................................................................. 39
subtitle.................................................................................. 39, 64
Menu
Picture......................................................................................... 35
MP3............................................................................................. 34
on-screen .................................................................................... 39
Setup........................................................................................... 63
Mode
recording......................................................................................26
Still Mode .....................................................................................64
MP3 ................................................................................................34
Noise reduction (NR)
DNR .............................................................................................40
Line-in NR....................................................................................40
One Touch Transfer (Copying) ..............................................50, 52
On-screen display.........................................................................38
PCM Down Conversion ................................................................64
Picture............................................................................................40
Playlist ...........................................................................................44
Progressive ..............................................................16, 20, 40, 76
Properties
playlist..........................................................................................45
title ...............................................................................................41
Protection
album ...........................................................................................48
card..............................................................................................60
cartridge.......................................................................................60
disc ..............................................................................................60
still picture....................................................................................47
title ...............................................................................................42
Quick Start................................................................................3, 63
Quick View.....................................................................................32
Ratings...........................................................................................64
Recording modes .........................................................................26
Remaining tape time.....................................................................38
Repeat play..............................................................................37, 39
Restore default settings...............................................................63
Resume play function ..................................................................32
Scheduled recording ....................................................................30
SD card ......................................................................................8, 11
Setup menu ...................................................................................63
Shorten Titles................................................................................42
Simultaneous recording and play ...............................................28
Soundtrack ....................................................................................39
SQPB..............................................................................................37
Status messages ..........................................................................40
Still pictures
copying ........................................................................................55
edit ...............................................................................................47
play ..............................................................................................35
Subtitle....................................................................................39, 64
Thumbnail......................................................................................42
TIFF ..........................................................................................36, 76
Time Slip........................................................................................33
Tracking.........................................................................................38
Transfer .........................................................................................40
Transfer (Copying)........................................................................49
TV Type..........................................................................................20
VHS settings..................................................................................65
VISS................................................................................................38
VP mode ........................................................................................26
V. Surround Sound .......................................................................40
Reproducción de un videocasete/Index
Index
87
RQTV0141
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No Warning : Invalid xref tableEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools